Home

MyCalls End User Manual

1. 4 Unassigned Callers Chapter 10 1 Callers 1 At the Configure Callers screen click Create or Edit a Caller The Edit Callers screen appears 01342897598 Delivery Tod Unassigned None Edit 01386712093 TMR Unassigned Mone Edit 01386712209 Tailor Made Unassigned Mone Edit O1dGAATIATI Coann Boe Blora Edit Add new caller 2 Click Add new caller to begin adding a new caller 3 The Create a Caller screen is displayed 4 Inthe dialogue window that appears a number of fields are available for entry Some are mandatory fields for successful setup whilst others are optional inputs as outlined below Number Alternate Number Name Type Caller Group Business None 5 Number Enter the callers main incoming number here that will be used to identify them 6 Alternate Number If the caller has different incoming and outgoing numbers a DID for instance then use the alternate number field for this 7 Name Enter a name for your caller to identify them clearly on real time windows and reporting 8 Type You can choose whether a caller is a Business or Personal caller by selecting the option from this field If you wish to create the caller but not assign them as either of the above then you can use the final option Unassigned until you decide on the most suitable type for the caller 9 Caller Group You can select a caller group from this field to group the caller with in order
2. Alarm if the item is in the list your list should only contain members on which you want to include for alarm purposes This means you have created a list of prohibited members e g any member of the list is not allowed to make mobile calls Alarm if the item is not in the list The list should only contain members which you wish to ignore for alarming purposes This means you have created a list of allowed members e g anyone in the list is allowed to make mobile calls And for numbers only Alarm on any number or no number the default value Generate an alarm irrespective of the presence or absence of a number in the call This ensures that if any of the three lists Numbers Callers Account Codes are used then the alarm will still be active NB If you set Never alarm on numbers Never alarm on callers Never alarm on account codes all at once the alarm will not be generated Chapter 11 11 Alarms 6 Never alarm on numbers Alarm on any number or no number Only alarm tt the number is in the list Only alarm it the number is not in the list Callers Never alarm on callers G Only alarm if the caller is in one of the groups in the list 6 Only alarm if the call is not in one of the groups in the list Account Codes Never alarm on account codes 6 Only alarm if the account code is in one of the groups in the list 6 Only alarm if the account code is not in one of the groups in the list
3. Special Usage Reports Trunk Utilization Report Provides statistics on trunk utilization over specified time intervals during the reporting period Statistics displayed are Interval period set in the configuration Maximum trunks Maximum number of trunks used at any one time during the interval First time at maximum When the maximum number of trunks was first reached Chapter 14 32 Reporting Duration Total call duration across all trunks included in the report Utilisation Percentage usage of trunks for the interval versus total trunks FBX Trunk Groups Head Office F All Analog Trunks E AI ISDN Trunks al acas Interval Interval Type All Private Wires i Hur E E All Q Sig Trunks E Al TCP IP Trunks Select None Order Report Output By E All Trunks Interval E Include Deleted Trunk Groups Maximum Trunks Average Trunks Total Duration Utilisation Trunk Utilisation Created On 24 10 2008 11 48 04 CoverngPenod 01 08 2008 00 00 00 to 10 08 2008 23 59 59 Report Filtered To Only include PBX Head Office Only include trunk groups All ISDN Trunks summary of trunk activity arranged into time intervals of 1 Day Report ordered by Interval Maximum First Time at Duration Utilisation Interval Period Trunks Maximum 01 08 2008 00 00 00 02 08 2008 00 00 00 20 01 08 2008 15 08 06 70 35 40 3 00 02 08 2008 00 00 00 03 08 2008 00 00 00 13 02 08 2008 10 22 24 34 55 05 1 00 03 06 2008 00 00 00 04 08
4. 1 Configure gt Operational Settings gt Grade of Service 2 Select the device from the available list on the left side e g Extension 3 Click Add This will transfer the available device group to the list of active groups for which limits can be set Each group defined for that device will be listed in the grid You can then define a set of limits for each specific group 4 The Move up and Move Down buttons allow you to define which limits will be used for a call If for example a call has both DID and Extension information then the Grade of Service group higher up in the list will be used to calculate the Grade of Service for that call PBX Head Office Prionties The higher up in the list a Group Type is the more important its limit is For example Ifa call contained both trunk and extension information and Trunk Group was higher in the list than Extension Group then the limit for the Trunk Group would be used Available Active System Wide Trunk Pes re aca as Pilot Number Account Code Remove User Group Limits note that a limit of 00 00 00 means the limit does not apply Group Name Group Type Inc Ovr Ring Abd Ring Inc Ovr Call Out Call Int Call a Reception Extension 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 Stationary Extension 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 Sales Extension 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 Admin Extension
5. Fixed departmental stats Breakdown by extension groups or individual extension Pilot ACD queues Analyse performance of ACD groups How well does my ACD grouping work Abandonment rates durations service levels DIDs Distinguish reasons for calling Tune responses to calls based on call type Set different service levels for different DIDs depending on how long a caller is willing to wait Users Can better reflect the organisation for reporting etc Enables call recording rules Agent control is possible more control over ACD handling Hot Desking allows users to log onto different extensions and so tracks users across extensions Supports subgroups such as sales book sales or sales music sales Trouble shooting Several reports and alarms are provided to help trouble shoot the phone system Trunk reports allow you to analyse where certain trunks may be held in state for a long period conversely if a trunk is not working correctly you can run an unused device report You can run reports to indicate where extensions and other devices are unused This may indicate wrongly configured devices This is particularly important if those devices are enabled for real time statistics as this can use up a considerable amount of system resources Chapter 1 15 Welcome to MyCalls Reports Trunks Status reports System reports Unused devices Alarms Alert you to problem areas System PBX activity and amount of disk space free
6. You can also associate the alarms with an Alarm Distribution List to define who will receive notification of this alarm For this example we choose the Managers list Chapter 11 8 Alarms y Toll Fraud Alarm Configuration Wizard Eo Toll Fraud Alarm Wizard This page allows you to specify the scheduling severity reporting and notification distribution of the alarm Schedule the alarm using the Alarm Schedule Es The alarm will always be sent to the Real Time Monitors E Send the alarm to the members of the Alarm Distribution List This alarm should be displayed as information Next you need to specify which Extensions Users and Pilot numbers you wish to include or exclude from these rules In this example we exclude Reception and Customer Service from the alarm list This is because these groups may well make legitimate calls to mobiles during the day You may need to reconsider how you have organised your groups as any extension can only belong to one group You may need to split the groups into smaller units for example Customer Service Staff and Customer Service Mobile Callers so that you can ensure only the Customer Service supervisors can call out to mobile numbers y Toll Fraud Alarm Configuration Wizard E Toll Fraud Alarm Wizard This page allows you to specify the included extensions users and pilot numbers Alarm notifications will only be sent if the extension user and pilot number present on the c
7. ni Comel Weekly Reports Select the group you wish to move the item to from the drop down menu Click OK The item will now be in the new group Chapter 14 11 Reporting How To Copying an existing Report Item as the basis for your new Report Click Reports Click Report Items Click Copy Report Item Report Name Enter the report name e g Daily Incoming Performance Click OK The report will have been copied How To Customising a copied Report item Click Reports Expand Report items Select the item that you wish to customise e g Daily Reports List All Calls to Voicemail It is recommended that you copy the report item first Click Copy Report Item This item once copied will appear in the list Select this newly copied report to edit Click Edit Report Item A new window will open where you can change the settings Click Next to navigate through and click Finish when you have made the changes How To Deleting a Report item Click Reports Click Report Items Select the item you wish to delete Click Delete Report Item Click Yes Chapter 14 12 Reporting General operations for configuring report templates and report items In order to create a report item you will need to configure the report so it renders the information you require There are a number of steps involved and the exact sequen
8. 14 Show Calls in Queue Label If enabled this will display in the window the CIQ label for the number of calls in queue value 15 Show Calls in Queue Value If enabled this will display in the window the number of calls in queue value 16 Show Longest Wait Label If enabled this will display in the window the Longest Call Waiting label for the longest call waiting value 17 Show Longest Wait Value If enabled this will display in the window the longest call waiting value DID Status DID AGENT SALES Caller Trunk CIQ O Longest Call Waiting 00 00 00 18 When you have completed the configuration of your windows settings then press the OK button and your window will be placed on the currently selected layouts page 19 Press Cancel at any time to abort the setup Queue Group status If you want to display the number of calls that have not been answered and are currently waiting in queue for one or more groups along with other head of queue information then a queue group status is required Chapter 5 8 Real Time Status Trunk Group Status E Drag a column header here to group by that column Column Chooser Group CIQ Longest ait Caller Trunk All ISDN Trunks 0 00 00 00 All Private lires 0 00 00 00 All TCPAP Trunks O 00 00 00 All Trunks 0 00 00 00 Devices which support queuing should be grouped so that useful information can be obtained from them Trunks could be grouped accordin
9. An IVR system responds to caller entered digits or speech recognition in much the same way that a conventional computer responds to keystrokes or clicks of a mouse When the IVR is integrated with database computers callers can interact with databases to check current information e g account balances and complete transactions e g make transfers between accounts Least Cost Routing LCR is an automated function which routes outgoing calls via the cheapest telecom operator available usually by dialling a prefix to the telephone number Local Area Network LAN The connection of multiple computers within a building so that they can share information applications and peripherals Local Exchange Carrier LEC Telephone companies responsible for providing local connections and services Chapter 17 6 Acronyms amp Glossary Long Call A call that has exceeded a specified talk time Used to identify which calls are taking longer to handle Can be used as a measure for further training of the operator or agent Longest Available Agent Also referred to as most idle agent A method of distributing calls to the agent who has been sitting idle the longest With a queue longest available agent becomes next available agent Longest Delay Oldest Call The longest time a caller has waited in queue before abandoning or reaching an agent Manual Answer The ACD system is set up so that agents must manually answer calls Manual Avai
10. Create or edit an extension Chapter 8 24 Telephone System Configuration A dialog showing existing extensions will appear From the list of extensions find the extension you wish to add to the group Click in the group column and select the group you wish to add the extension to Repeat this for any other extensions Click OK Your extensions are now assigned to the user defined groups Having added devices to a group you can then go back and edit the device attributes from within the group window How To Editing devices within a group 9 From the MyCalls Telephone System Configuration screen click to expand Extension Groups Oi Groups HRe Account Code Groups Ee DID Groups B E Extension Groups belj All Analog Phones E All Announcement Ports JE All Auto Attendants JE All Cordless Phones JE All Desk Phones JE All Digital Phones EE Reception f Linassioned Prtensions 10 Select the group you want to edit Click View or Edit the Group in the Extension Group configuration area 11 If the group already contains devices then you can edit each device as described below Alternatively you can press the Add New Device button and this will display the device configuration dialog as described previously Once configured press OK and the new device will be added to the group Number Name Type Group Enable Statistics 208 208 Unassigned None Edit 235 Reception Digital D
11. Custom Group Member Summary Daily Summary of ACD Group Performance Created On 18 11 2008 11 36 21 CoveringPeriod 18 11 2008 00 00 00 to 18 11 2008 23 59 59 Report Filtered To Only include call types Incoming or Incoming Conference or Incoming Abandoned or Incoming Abandoned Voice Mail or Incoming Transferred or Incoming Pickup or Incoming Divert or Incoming Intraflow or Incoming Overflow or Incoming Internal or Incoming Internal Abandoned or Incoming Internal Intraflow or Incoming Internal Overflow or Network Incoming or Intercom or Intercom Conference or Intercom Abandoned or Intercom Transferred or Intercom Divert or Intercom Page or Intercom Park or Intercom Consultation Show summaries forthe device type Pilot Number Transferred calls are being reported as a multiple calls Group Inc Abd Inc Ow Ring lt 5 s Ring lt 10 s Ring gt 10 s Ans 80 of calls Avg inc Ring Avg Inc Call Grade of Service Head Office All ACDQueues 01 Sales 0 0 0 0 00 0 00 0 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 0 00 02 Returns 0 0 0 0 00 0 00 0 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 0 00 Totals 0 0 0 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 0 00 List All Abandoned Calls Provides a list of abandoned calls that are grouped by a specified device type such as extension or account code The report can be further filtered so it only applies to a certain range of devices such as a specific extension group or organization group Call Details List All Abandoned Calls Created
12. Licensed Digital Main Office Digital Main Office Digital None Digital None Digital 26 Chapter 7 9 Call Recording The Call recorder configuration screen allows the setting up of call recorder units Licensing of Trunks and the editing of call recorder settings and recording rules How To Add Call Recorders to the MyCalls Configuration 1 To add a new call recorder click the Add Call Recorder button The window below will appear Call Recorder Configuration Specify the Call Recorder Type Before the configuration for a call recorder can take place the type of call recorder needs to be specified Call Recorder Type Retell None ok rete ie 2 Select the call recorder type from the drop down menu and enter a name e g Crompton Road 3 Click OK 4 The call recorder will now appear in the Installed Call Recorders section Installed Call Recorders Name Main Office Crompton Road Add call recorder Delete call recorder 5 Select the required call recorder and click Edit 6 The Call recording configuration screen will be displayed Chapter 7 10 Call Recording Retell Voice Recorder Confiquration ax Retell Voice Recorder Enter the machine name or IF address of the Retell Voice Recorder Enter the access password and modify the recording port or user name if necessary Finally click the Test Connection button to ens
13. Specify the time period the report should cover The report can be run over a changing period depending on when itis run such as this week or as a fixed time The reporting period can also include two time periods with in the defined date ranges such as 09 00 to 12 00 Feriod1 and 13 00 to 17 00 Period2 This will only include calls that were handled within each of these time periods Reporting Period Regular Today Period 1 Start Period 1 End 00 00 00 amp 23 59 59 Start Date Start Time E 10 2008 00 00 00 Include calls for the following days W Mon Mf Wed W Fn W Sat 23 10 2008 PA i W Tue F Thu W Sun End Date End Time Finish Regular Select the report period from the drop down menu e g this week last week etc Reporting Period Regular Today P h Today Yesterday B This Week E Last Week This Month Last Month This Year 59 Last Year sa m Custom Specify the Start End date and times Clicking on the Date displays a calendar control to make selection of Dates easier Chapter 14 14 Reporting go di EJ 10 2008 ad lt October 2008 gt Mo Tu We Th Fr Sa Su 93 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 amp 9 10 Ti 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22s 24 25 26 27 28 2 A 7 1 2 c y fa fg a h h F E pm f Today Include calls for the following days A series of check boxes allowing you to select which days of the week are included in the report Def
14. 0 0 eee ee re an et ee ee eee eee 6 How To Delete a Caller group configuration wwii eacciWaseeicierses nake natives eiiccess ois sacar ieeeesiveee 6 Chapter LL ALARMS eniin a eco aaccceectiudesediece T E A a a 1 Managing by exception using the MyCalls Alarm System ccccccssccccseccceseceeeneeeeeeeeeeeeceseeceneneeees 1 PANT CACO OTN E Sion AA OEE E O 1 Sewice level AIA MS nensi a a a a A N 2 WIC WIS the aldri S anea a aa 3 Accessne Alarm OOUIOMS nimonia nioi A AN 3 CONteUring Real TIMEAS deona e a aneut Rare ni ald aaeaaoade terres at 3 ag MyCalls Advanced Call Management System SV EMALIT See re rt a ee ee 3 Call Rave Alar Sron aa coi ccaesacnee eta AN Me ee a 4 PET ORMMAN CO Al ANS eunan oces eagaa cesiedeonaetununsecaneasaanaaaicascaneacusaaiee suuiodewerackwauwia Waeemu pasa cungaconenecs 5 Emersency Alar een rn tne er ne ee eee 7 TOFOA AN T sac at ccececaner ace O teense 7 NN oP AIS ieee ara ees ecaceag eaten ataaa a mente ess 12 Status Alar MS corir a A E Vaasa SAA ees 13 Quede Status Alar Mieris S 13 Users tatus Alak Ea O T A TO 13 Alarmo CMC GUNES tang isst cies rn E A tee Gees acaeeaeaeaaseaes 14 Alar DIST UUOM LISTS tense teceaaiceastud onnares ssa puateauicnaneat Sjeastaa cues ten noteteane eu lenae weet set ceest ee 15 PAV AISI SOWIE TOONS cs case pate a a aches asa a ee eee ete at terete ties pace ANAN 17 Real Time NOLMCAUIONS esans colina cece scaativonded cammana a S denaaaoauecdeenusanenuungace sens 18 Chapt
15. IMPORTING a Telephone OI erresranea inarin TE A a ene TEA S 4 HOW TO Importa Telephone Dillian aE EEE EOT AEEA 4 RECOS IE Calls a T E A A S 6 POW WO ROS COST Callll Sr ascrtee coun sanacet a oman saad warmenaes acta E tanta T 6 Arer 016 al 8 a 910 6 eae epee ee ate ME aE TO Sr eT SY Ee ee ee 6 HOW LO IMDOn ATEI COUE Sarana ito si tua E E E sae a E e A 7 Chapter 16 IMPORTING DATA INTO MYCALLS csccsccssccsccsccsscsscssccsscsscnscescssosscsscesees 8 IMPONE EVIC Srca o A ES NE I E E NROS E 8 Device IMPOrt TOLMAS nrinn E N E E hw tadacamheeaieuausabinedeete 8 FIOW TOSIIMPOrt a SECO EXTENSIONS ya naar n A A A A NANON 2 IMPORCIE a Meaucutiaten did tadaausctatatesn diab aan cuuetacin eaaccadetaldtaleaw tas lanvdrc tah cedsasatedeateeuaae 3 MDOE USE Siere ve ealrpasice cnc wticwatsaiaw A E EE E EEE 3 HOW TO IMPOrUnNg USCIS agossa a a a T a NE 4 Chapter 17 ACRONYMS amp GLOSSARY ssessssessosssessssessosssecsssesecsesscsesscsesesecssssosssesessessose 1 ACTONVI iaraa E E N T E 1 COS Sey PEI IAE ENE ENEI IE ean IE E IE EET I EEEE EIE E EEEIEI T TAT 3 Appendix A MyCalls Licensing s esesesesesesesesesessessssssceseosoesececesececececesesesesssssssesssesososssoeseoe 1 Welcome to MyCalls Chapter 1 Welcome to MyCalls Welcome to MyCalls the Call Accounting and Management application which puts you in control of the communications into and out of your business With MyCalls you can measure all aspects of your telephone s
16. MW Incoming E Overflow 6 The window will appear on the screen Real Time Parameter Window E Incoming Calls All Account Codes Head Office Daily 7 Click OK Combination Value Windows A combination window displays several statistics at the same time These can be used to see how one value affects another like a difference in call volume might result in customers receiving longer waiting times In this example more people are needed to answer calls to keep the wait time the same Chapter 6 15 Real Time Statistics ial Real Time Status ial Real Time Statistics fad Single Value fal Combination Values E S Account Code Groups cel Ga Extension Groups Ga Organisation Groups cla Pilot Number Groups Glee Trunk Groups How To Creating Combination Value Real Time Parameter windows Click to expand Combination Select the group you wish to expand e g DIDs You are now presented with two options clicking call rate or performance If you click call rate you will be presented with a call volume chart If you click performance you will be presented with a chart of call wait time ranges On both occasions the following window will appear FEX Display Values E Historical Interval Period Group Daily AI Account Codes Refresh Time 5 7 You can alter the interval period the group and the refresh time 8 Click OK Removing a Real Time wind
17. Some are mandatory fields for successful setup whilst others are optional inputs as outlined below Name Abbreviation Job Title Group Organisation User Role Email Address ser Password Enable Call Playback Enable Real Time Statistics Chapter 9 5 Organisation and Users 4 Name Enter the users name here that will be used to identify them in the system 5 Abbreviation If the user has an abbreviated name or nickname they would like to be known by then you can enter it here in this field 6 Job Title Enter a job title to describe the users position within the organization 7 User Role Select a user role for your user from the pre defined list 8 Email Address You can enter an email address for your user so that if they are configured as an Administrative User of an organization group then they receive reports and alarms on that groups activity directly 9 Password If the user is required to enter a password to login then enter one in here 10 Enable Call Playback If the user is going to need to listen to recorded conversations then they will need to enable this option to do so 11 Enable Real Time Statistics For real time statistics to be collected for the user this option needs to be enabled If you no longer with to collect info on the user then turn this option off 12 Click OK 13 The caller should now be visible in Configure Organisation Structure window Once
18. click User Logins Pin Codes 2 Click Create or Edit a User Login in the User Login configuration area 3 Inthe dialog box that appears click the Edit button to the right of the user login you want to edit 4 Inthe second dialog box that appears configure a Login ID for the user login and if required select a User to associate with this ID Login ID User 302 None Select 5 Click OK 6 Repeat stages 2 to 5 for as many user logins as you need to configure 7 Click the OK to save all the changes you have made Group configuration Grouping devices allows you to monitor and report on overall performance of areas of your business rather than individuals You can also analyse individuals within a given group and ignore other devices or compare one group against another Chapter 8 21 Telephone System Configuration The first step in creating a group of devices requires you to gather information regarding groups of devices such as extensions or DIDs Once you have done this creating a group of devices is straightforward Creating and organising your groups is similar regardless of the device type being grouped You can create and populate groups of any device type and name that group according to function e g Sales or to location e g Dave s office or to indicate a device type e g BRI trunk 1 Some devices have some predefined groups namely Extensions Analogue Digital Desk etc Pi
19. column and then select one of the costing periods from the Cost Period column Periods selectable are hourly daily weekly monthly quarterly and yearly 7 Click OK Chapter 12 3 Call Costing Editing fixed Additional Costs Fixed additional costs are any other user configured cost that may apply to a trunk or extension device types This could be to include premiums for feature phones over normal phones for example Additional costs must be configured with a unique name You can enter negative additional costs that will be subtracted from any other costs The amount entered can be specified as an amount for a period defined as hourly daily weekly monthly quarterly or yearly How To Editing fixed additional costs 1 Select the Costs option from the Configure menu or click the icon on the toolbar 2 Expand the Fixed Costs category in the left pane of the window This will display all available PBXs in your enterprise Then expand the PBX you want to configure costs for 3 Click the Additional Type Costs option 4 Click Edit Additional Costs 5 This window will list all existing additional fixed costs in the system To add a new additional cost click Add 6 Enter a unique name at the next screen for the new additional cost item 7 The new additional costing item will appear in the listing of cost items Name Cost E Cost Period 5 Line Display Surcharge 40 00 Year
20. e Auto Configured devices e System Audit e Unused devices e Call Summary e Call Details e Call Type Summary e Group Summary e For each member e Time Profile e Top Calls e Trunk Utilisation The Usage reports also provide a set of custom reports which allow you to configure the result columns of the report to suit your requirements Custom reports are available for e Call Details e Group Summary e Group Summary for each member e Group Summary profile Running a report Template Z Va Quick tip Whilst you can configure and run a report template directly it is not the recommended approach The correct way to configure a report is to take a report template and save it as a report item first This allows you to configure a variant of the template with specific configuration parameters The report can then be rendered at any time Chapter 14 2 Reporting How To Run a Report Template immediately 1 You can do this by clicking the Configure and Run Now link in the right pane of the reporting area You will have first had to select the relevant report you wish to run in the left pane of the configure reports window to make it the active report 2 You will then need to configure the reports options before the report will be run and displayed in the report viewer Using Report Items Report Items are report templates that have been configured and saved They are created from the Create Saved Report
21. 00 00 00 Wednesday 4 742 00 04 12 00 00 14 00 34 32 00 02 20 379 00 06 37 00 00 36 00 00 00 00 00 00 Friday 5 340 00 03 43 00 00 14 00 45 00 00 02 22 507 00 05 00 00 00 36 00 00 00 00 00 00 Sunday 915 00 01 27 00 00 02 00 31 49 00 01 11 34 00 01 02 00 00 14 00 00 00 00 00 00 Note in the report shown the days of the week appear out of order however if we view it from the perspective of wanting to know which days of the week during August are giving the longest wait times then this report will tell us very quickly in this case it is Saturday with Sunday having the shortest response time call Summary Time Distribution Report In many cases you may have a set of markers which define what the minimum maximum and optimum times are for ring time held time and duration of calls You may wish to analyse how many of your calls fall inside and outside these time slots You can use the Time Distribution report to do just that The time Distribution report allows us to define a set of time slots starting at a particular value e g 10 seconds and repeating up to a final value e g 60 seconds at 5 second intervals This would give us time slots as follows 10 15 seconds Chapter 14 29 Reporting 16 20 seconds 21 25 Seconds 26 30 seconds And so on up to 60 seconds This report will then tell us how many calls over a given reporting period fall into each of these time slots Obviously this allows us to determine what our current operating t
22. 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 5 Click OK 6 Toremove a device simply select the device in the active section on the right side e g extension and click remove 7 Click OK Grace periods What are grace periods Grace periods allow you to specify the minimum ring time an abandoned call must have and the minimum call time incoming outgoing and internal calls must have to be regarded as true calls Only true calls will be used in the call statistics Chapter 8 31 Telephone System Configuration You can define grace periods on the following e Abandoned Wait Time e Incoming Call Duration e Outgoing Call Duration e Intercom Call Duration Grace periods configuration PBX m Head Office Prionties The higher up in the lista Group Type is the more important its limit is For example If a call contained both trunk and extension information and Trunk Group was higher in the list than Extension Group then the limit for the Trunk Group would be used Available Active System Wide Extension Trunk ER a DID Add gt i Move Up Pilot Number mL i Account Code Remove Mowe Down Group Type Abd Ring Inc Call OutCall IntCall Extension 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 rr aaa a a SORA oe ae oa Mee ee Ene NOOR ORTON FONG 00 0000 00000 Chapter 8 32 Organisation and Users Chapter 9 Organisation
23. 00 00 19 00 00 20 00 00 07 00 19 49 00 05 20 19 00 00 20 00 00 07 00 19 49 00 05 20 02 08 2008 00 00 00 02 08 2008 04 00 00 10 00 00 25 00 00 11 00 01 04 00 00 29 10 00 00 25 00 00 11 00 01 04 00 00 29 02 08 2008 04 00 00 02 08 2008 08 00 00 8 00 00 12 00 00 03 00 04 48 00 01 04 8 00 00 12 00 00 03 00 04 48 00 01 04 02 08 2008 08 00 00 02 08 2008 12 00 00 468 00 03 33 00 00 17 00 52 01 00 02 17 468 00 03 33 00 00 17 00 52 01 00 02 17 02 08 2008 12 00 00 02 08 2008 16 00 00 439 00 05 31 00 00 26 00 24 55 00 01 44 439 00 05 31 00 00 26 00 24 55 00 01 44 02 08 2008 16 00 00 02 08 2008 20 00 00 128 00 02 33 00 00 16 00 15 05 00 01 40 128 00 02 33 00 00 16 00 15 05 00 01 40 02 08 2008 20 00 00 03 08 2008 00 00 00 21 00 00 12 00 00 04 00 05 01 00 01 16 21 00 00 12 00 00 04 00 05 01 00 01 16 Configuration requires you to set the Interval count and the interval value For example an interval count of 4 and an interval setting of Hour will give a report statistic calculated every 4 hours Ordering can be based on The specified interval Default Number from 1 or 2 call type Maximum ring from 1 or 2 call type Maximum Duration from the 1 or 2 call type Average duration from 1 or 2 call type First Set of Call Types to Include Together Second Set of Call Types to Include Together E Unknown n incoming E Incoming Conference B E Incoming Abandoned E Incoming Abandoned Voice M N E Incoming Abandoned Voice M E Incomin
24. 2008 00 00 00 4 03 06 2008 10 02 03 06 19 47 0 00 04 08 2008 00 00 00 05 08 2008 00 00 00 26 0408 2008 10 29 30 101 38 09 4 00 05 08 2008 00 00 00 06 08 2008 00 00 00 20 05 08 2008 13 36 25 94 17 26 4 00 06 08 2008 00 00 00 07 08 2008 00 00 00 21 06 08 2008 11 53 58 63 11 43 4 00 07 08 2008 00 00 00 08 08 2008 00 00 00 19 07 08 2008 15 21 51 4 21 12 3 00 08 08 2008 00 00 00 O9 08 2008 00 00 00 20 08 08 2008 10 48 08 73 01 47 3 00 09 08 2008 00 00 00 10 08 2008 00 00 00 11 09 08 2008 09 57 21 35 08 13 1 00 10 08 2008 00 00 00 17 08 2008 00 00 00 3 10 06 2008 15 52 35 02 23 49 0 00 17 08 2008 00 00 00 11 08 2008 00 00 00 0 00 00 00 0 00 Most frequent calls Gives details of which numbers have been handled most frequently for both incoming and outgoing You can specify a minimum number of calls before a number is included in the report Chapter 14 33 Reporting Minimum Number of Calls Number of Items on Report Limit number of items 50 O Display all matching items Order Report Output By Number of Times Statistics for these calls in the report are e Caller Name e Call type e Number e Location e Amount e Total duration of calls to and from that number e Cost and total cost of calls to that number Most Frequent Calls Created On 24 10 2008 12 01 15 Covering Period 01 08 2008 00 00 00 to 10 08 2008 23 59 59 Report Filtered To Only include numbers where the number of calls to from
25. Item option from the report template Each report item must be uniquely named and once created they can be e Run in the same way as a template report e Edited e Deleted Placed into report schedules and run at a predefined time By default MyCalls when installed will have a number of pre configured report items available to be run The report items available will depend on the version of MyCalls being run being either the Basic or Call Manager version Pre defined Report items Custom Reports Daily Agent Activity Provides a summary set of values for all agents of a group for any given type of device The information included on the report is user selectable along with the headings and widths of the columns used to display the information Custom Group Member Summary Daily Agent Activity Created On 18 11 2008 11 14 08 Covering Pernod 16 11 2006 00 00 00 to 16 11 2006 23 59 59 Report Filtered To show summaries for the device type Organisation Group Transferred calls are being reported as a multiple calls Group First LogIn At Last Log Out At o Time Free gt Time Busy o Time Unavailable So Time Wrapup Chapter 14 3 Reporting Daily Costs by Telephone Number Provides a list of detailed calls that are grouped by a specified device type such as extension or account code The report can be further filtered so it only applies to a certain range of devices such as a specific extensions group or organization
26. John John Northwich Northwich mm iL Alei SL Costing Class _ Duration National 00 02 55 National 00 05 21 Incoming 00 00 5 00 02 0 _ Common features of real time information windows Chapter 3 2 Y Alarms UE Calls UE Unreturned Calls ia Audit Log Licensed to User Max Jones Company Bespoke Travel Services Expires on 31 12 2165 MyCalls User Environment The windows visible on the MyCalls main screen are individually configurable Depending on the type of screen they may have a number of options available Status and statistics screens all have the option to lock Refresh and configure using the context menu which is viewed by right clicking the mouse whilst hovering over the window Using the mouse you can hover over any real time window and press the right mouse button to get a menu of window options Real Time Parameter Window E Real T Incoming Calls All Trunks Head Office BETI G LoekPostion Refresh Data Configure The single parameter window menu has the following options available Lock Position This allows you to lock a window in place on the screen layout so that it can no longer be re sized or moved When a window is locked it loses its borders and if you right click on it again you will see a tick next to the Lock Position option To unlock a window select the Lock Position option again to remove the tick an
27. Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat Sun E Daytime CE T T TTT Evenig 18 00 00 73 59 59 M a M H F Morning 00 00 00 07 59 59 A E Weekend 00 00 00 23 59 59 ES ee F al ak 7 Ifyou want to remove a costing period then simply select it from the list to highlight it and click Remove You will not be prompted to confirm and the costing period will be deleted from the system 8 Click OK Carrier Rates Carrier Rates are the calculations used by carriers to determine the cost of a call MyCalls has two types of carrier rates System and User defined The system defined rates are Local National International and Special Numbers These rates cannot be deleted and by default calls will be costed according to these rates when a carrier is added It is quite rare that carriers will have such a simplistic costing structure and the user is generally required to create rates that match those provided by their carrier When adding a new carrier rate make sure the costs have been entered into all of the periods otherwise calls in those periods will be costed at nothing Chapter 12 20 Call Costing If the tariff has only one price and it does not vary by the length of the call then you must use the There after charging period How To Add or Import a new Carrier Rate Select the Costs option from the Configure menu or click the icon on the toolbar Expand the Carriers option and select the Ca
28. Outgoing Short Calls Chapter 14 36 Reporting Drag the columns to define their order from left to right on the report If you wish you can preview the report at this time by clicking the Preview Report button You will see a resulting report which shows the columns configured but the data will not be accurate Complete the configuration of the rest of the report i e Filtering Transfer consolidation and call types Save the report item Custom Report Parameters Custom reports by definition can contain a very wide range of parameters in the various report columns Depending on the purpose of the report you will select parameters from one or more main categories The actual parameters available for your custom report will differ depending on the custom report template you have chosen to base your report on Parameters can be selected from the Available Information option in the custom report configuration wizard Change adel Styles be 5 Go caj a report Abandoned Ring sults of different groups over the same time period Average Abandoned Ring pe to group by CANNOT be one used in the filter A Held e Available Information button and select or ir eles fy the order by clicking on a header and moving it E Average Incoming vill also remove the information from the report f e Average Incoming Outgoing Average Incoming Ring Average Outgoing Select up to 10 unavailable codes Average R
29. Recording To ensure call recordings are only visible to users with appropriate permissions it is important to setup the organisational hierarchy correctly In the example below the highest level group is called Office admin and in that group there is a Supervisor Mark The supervisor can playback any calls from office admin and customer service The Supervisor in customer service Sarah however can only playback calls in the customer service group Configure Organisation Structure Ba Organisation SR Office admin fot ab Mark 4 Customer service For the Hierarchal user structure to work correctly the users must be assigned to extensions To assign a user to an extension go to configure telephone system and edit an extension The user is only assigned to calls on that extension from the time the extension is assigned to them How to Enable a User for playback 1 In Configure gt Organisation click Create New User or Edit an Existing User Create a New User a Assign the correct user role Users are people who in generally employed by the organisation By setting the users role you can restrict configuration modifications to the appropriate users Name Abbreviation Bemard BF Job Title group Sales Agent Organisation User Role Email Address Agent Desktop User bt myco com Password Enable Call Playback Enable Real Time Statistics 2 To give a user the ability to playback calls chec
30. Show Interval F Show Value V Show PBX Numerical values appear as a single coloured window showing the parameter value and other associated information such as Title Group and the Interval over which the statistic is calculated e g daily hourly Call Rate statistics show the cumulative counts for the various call types and you can elect to display these values over both historical daily hourly periods and current last hour periods Chapter 6 2 Real Time Statistics Call Performance statistics are either cumulative totals e g number of long calls or average values e g average wait time The cumulative total statistics can only display values numerically and you can select both historical and current calculation periods The Average value statistics can be displayed in both numeric and graphical format and the Statistical period is limited to either Daily or 24 Hour options If you elect to display the values in numerical format you will need to select the Show Single Value Checkbox in the configuration screen and this option is only be available for the daily period See detailed configuration later in this section Avg Inc Call Time All Extension Types Head Office Daily 119 Numerical View of average wait time statistic The graphical output displays the Min Max values for the parameter as a bar and the average value is shown as a line graph over the 24 hour period Graphical
31. System Configuration screen click Account Codes 2 Click Create or Edit an Account Code The Edit Account Codes screen appears 3 Click Add New Account Code 4 Inthe dialogue window that appears a number of fields are available for entry Some are mandatory fields for successful setup whilst others are optional inputs as outlined below PEX Code Number Head Office Name Account Code Group None 5 Number Enter here the number of the account code you wish to create This must be for a valid account code configured on your telephone system 6 Name Enter a name for your account code to identify its purpose If left blank the system will populate this field with the Number 7 Account Code Group You can select an account code group to group this code under The values in this list are configurable under Account Code Groups The default value is set to None 8 Click OK How To Creating a range of Account Codes From the MyCalls Telephone System Configuration screen click Account Codes Click Create a Range of Account Codes In the dialogue window that appears a number of fields are available for entry Some are mandatory fields for successful setup whilst others are optional inputs FEX Code Number of amp ccount Codes Head Office 1 Start Account Code Number Account Code Group None Chapter 8 16 Telephone System Configuration Number of Account Codes Enter
32. Usage Performance service levels etc Emergency alarms indicate when emergency numbers are used Call rates set and monitor Toll fraud and security Trunk utilisation alarm on the number of concurrently busy trunks Device status detects when devices are busy or free for extended periods or when an extension is off hook for an extended period User status detects when a user goes into wrap up DND or unavailable a specified number of times or for an extended period Queue status detects when a queue Trunk DID or ACD exceeds a certain length or the maximum wait time exceeds a specified period Hunt Groups and ACD queues Depending on the type of calls or volume of calls you may need to implement call queuing You can use a queuing mechanism to attempt to keep callers on the line for longer using a mixture of tactics which include music on hold and injecting messages at regular intervals Call Routing can be implemented by the use of e Hunt Groups e ACD Hunt Groups Hunt groups are a rudimentary form of queuing where an incoming call is sent around a group of extensions Incoming calls are allowed to roll over to the next available extension until the call is answered The problem with hunt groups is that the logic is very simple and thus does not provide a particularly even distribution of calls across a group acD Automatic Call Distribution or ACD provides a number of queues programmed into the telephone
33. When setting up a toll fraud alarm you will probably need to define a set of numbers to identify the calls that you wish to trap within the alarm conditions For example calls to mobiles beginning with 07 or calls to a specific area code or even call outside a specified set of area codes When setting these conditions see example below you will need to enter either complete or partial numbers A number can be specified in the full such as 01260519221 Partial numbers can either be with one or more specific digits and entered with a or as a starting number followed by any digits and entered with a 012607230 2 will trigger on 01260723002 01260723012 01260723022 01260723032 01260723092 01260 will trigger on any number beginning with 01260 International numbers from the United Kingdom can be detected by 00 Example Restricting Personal Mobile Calls Problem Create a toll fraud alarm that has incoming and outgoing calls selected and traps any non Business calls to a mobile number Create a new Toll Fraud Alarm and name it Mobile Calls Click Next i Toll Fraud Alarm Configuration Wizard a l E Toll Fraud Alarm Wizard Please enter a name for this toll fraud alarm so that others can easily identify it Name Mobile Numbers Specify the Alarm Schedule associated with this alarm type in this case we only want to monitor these calls during the daytime so we associate the alarm with the schedule Daily Alarms
34. a a A ne annateoniaaaeadtes 8 How To View screen as an Agent Desktop USEF cccecccsseecccesecceeseeceeececeneeeeeeeceeeueeeeeecessunecenees 8 RESETEING Installation Derun S iia ccessinecteshioncttriccculuhisteciialtncuaadincatanheemeeiatencuariancutuhee ated uceucecctuides 8 How To Reset to installation ACefaults cccccccsssssssssseccccccseeessesecccccesseeeesseeccecesesssuaeseeeceeseeaageas 8 ChapterS REAL TIME STATUS ccccacicescpee cece aces ninncccaeseersinctiecese NAE E E Nae 1 What are Real Time WINdOWS sser tiaras sad cseduess See E sad olsen eae se 1 SUV INS icici dsl cee sages Gare apanteai wasn cece igeicecd a teeas ou cas tae aha van mem E OE A 1 CS FOU S oc ciorscacsedesenacaueae e a E A 1 How To Accessing Real Time WINGOWS ccccssecccssecccesececenececenceeeeseceseneceseeceseueeesuessessuesensueeesees 1 Real Time Status WiInQOWSs 0 cc51c62ccabuiersanseesssiacacasgaiecrsaeauieraetsossenentuaciaennse nestanerssaledapegieaenaenanenteabanees 2 Real Time Stat s Parameters sorreran EE eased dcghuteldsawtat Sisk sede dh Ea ATTE AA i 2 User Extension SLALUS VIEWS iorecanina i EE tied aitvsanetiawiecctiokdtast 4 Detail Summary and Overview VIEWS ssssseesssessseressressrrrssrersrerssrersseroseersserssreesrereseereseeseeeseeeeseeo 4 Creatine User Status VIC WS minnein n e R E O N aysagendeneeenarsaeeneeesteunenes 5 HOW ton Creating anew User Sratus VIOW acct hee ladsetinnaparineceiuetecsudenienqusnanaviaheendiest
35. a custom report custom call details reporting on the locations area codes called in order to determine whether a specific telemarketing area is receiving too much attention or not getting enough Managers can also use call accounting reports to compare the amount of time employees are spending on the phone versus the number of accounts that are being served or the new business that is won DID reporting provide analyses of calls by the number used e g marketing companies rebilling for customers Professional service In most professional service organizations employees are required to keep a manual running log of the time they spend on the phone with their clients or on their client s behalf Billing departments are then required to manually post the time and corresponding costs With MyCalls this entire process is automated First each active customer is assigned an account code which is entered into the phone at the end of a telephone call and recorded by the call accounting system Then account code or ad hoc reports can be run to verify the time spent on the telephone for that account Brokerage Brokerage companies can use MyCalls to monitor the calling patterns of the sales staff usually on a daily or weekly basis Often these call patterns are used in conjunction with a client s portfolio If a broker has not made enough sales calls or is spending too much time with a client who has not purchased any stocks a call this will
36. a rough calculation that approximately 17 000 of a total of 23 000 calls fell within the 20 second answer time This equates to a service level of around 73 which means that about a quarter of calls are taking more than 20 seconds to answer MyCalls allows for considerably more accuracy in these calculations taking into account several other parameters for simplicity the whole table of data from which the service level was calculated is not shown Valid calls and grace periods When configuring service levels it is important to define what are considered to be valid ring times If a call is abandoned very quickly it may be that the caller had misdialled or changed their mind about the call These incidents should not be considered valid calls as it would be impossible to Chapter 1 12 Welcome to MyCalls answer them To eliminate this kind of call from the statistics you can set grace periods Grace periods effectively ignore short ring times when marking a call as abandoned What about the call durations Again very short calls may indicate a caller has either misdialled or been put through to the wrong department etc In this event we can define a minimum call duration below which the call is marked as a short call Conversely we want to aim to complete calls within a specified period so we can mark calls lasting longer than a certain time as a long call These parameters are configured as part of the operations settings under grace peri
37. all groups you can put them in the top level of the hierarchy by hovering over the Organisation group and releasing the mouse 4 You can also use the Edit User Configuration window to change the organisation group 5 Select the user you wish to remove from a group 6 Click Edit User Configuration Name Abbreviation Job Title Jahn Sales manager Group Fath Group User Role Organisation Sales Sales PEX Administrator m Office admin Password Organisation o Z Last Modified By ES es ye _ KELMAR SOFTWARE maxine Email Address Creation Date Last Modified Date 06 10 2008 15 41 58 16 10 2008 11 40 00 Enable Real Time Statistics Enable Call Playback 7 Inthe window that appears simply use the drop down menu group and assign them to a different group 8 Click OK Importing users You can import a csv comma separated values file directly into MyCalls to speed up user setup This file should include the following columns Name Abbreviation Password Email Address Job Title Login PIN Default Extension in that order to be imported successfully Chapter 9 9 Organisation and Users How To Import Users 1 From the Organisational Configuration screen click Import Users Filename FEX that users logon to Head Office In the window that is displayed select a valid csv file by clicking the Browse button navigating to the file then selecting it and
38. and choose a destination directory to save the report in You can choose a pre defined report group from the drop down list or you can enter a new report group manually Next you will need to configure the report options before the report item will be saved and available to run from the report group you saved it in How To Editing a Report item Each report item can be edited as required and the resulting changes saved Open the report item by clicking Edit Report item Go through the report wizard and make the required changes to the report Click Finish Your changed have now been saved If the changes to the report are extensive it is recommended that you copy the report item first and then rename the copy and edit that Chapter 14 10 Reporting How To Creating a Report item group Click Reports Click Report Items on the left side of the configure reports window m e UW Select the item you wish to create a group for e g Daily Agent Activity N D Click Change Group in the right side of the configure reports area Report Group Ea rs 5 Enter the name of the new group you wish to create 6 Click OK How To Moving a Report item to a different group Click Reports Click Report Items Select the item that you wish to move Click Change Group in the reports configuration area Report Group Lx Custom Reports Daily Reports
39. be revealed Another important use of MyCalls is the storage of historical call information Suppose a client calls to order a particular stock and then the next day when the stock s value declines the client denies purchase of the stock For litigation purposes companies can review the historical call records and retrieve a record of the actual call Misuse of the telephone system Installation of MyCalls often has a significant effect on reducing employees misuse of the telephone network In fact many companies see a large reduction in the number of personal telephone calls as soon as they make employees aware that a call accounting system is in use To detect toll fraud MyCalls can be set up to alert you when certain criteria do not follow what has been defined as normal calling activity Alerts can be sent remotely by email or can display an alert immediately upon completion of any call that seems suspicious Having access to this information gives systems administrators the opportunity to take preventive measures You can use a variety of reports provided by a call accounting system to assist in managing employees For instance a manager can provide employees with a list of their calls on a daily weekly or monthly basis This list can help a manager determine if the employee is spending his or her time making business related phone calls or excessive personal calls Hopefully it will also deter the employee from making personal long dist
40. button to indicate it has been acknowledged Accessing Alarm Options Using the MyCalls menu you can access the alarm screens using Configure gt Alarms gt PBXs OR you can click the alarm icon in the toolbar Configuring Real Time Alarms MyCalls alarms are generated in real time You can have the alarms pop up on screen to warn operators of alarm conditions as they occur Alarms are also recorded in the Alarms grid accessible from the toolbar at the bottom of the main screen When you configure an alarm you will invoke an alarm configuration wizard The wizard will require you to enter the name for the alarm and select both a distribution list and an alarm schedule The distribution lists will ensure the alarm reaches the appropriate people and the schedule limits the time periods when the alarm is active so before you can configure an alarm you will need to have set up your alarm schedules and distribution lists These topics are covered in more detail toward the end of this section system Alarms System alarms monitor the status of the system This falls into two parts Chapter 11 3 Alarms e PBX data monitoring e Disk space monitoring PBX Data Monitoring The MyCalls system regularly receives call data from the PBX If MyCalls does not receive data from the PBX it could mean there is a fault on the PBX This alarm checks to see how long ago the last call record has been received from the PBX This can i
41. call type set The Interval period e g Day of Week is selected from a drop down menu during configuration of the report and includes e Minute of hour 1 to 60 e Half hour of day 00 00 00 30 00 30 01 00 etc e Hour of day 0 1 1 2 2 3 etc e Day of week Mon Tue Wed etc e Day of month 1 31 etc e Dayofyear 1 365 6 e Week of year 1 52 e Month of year 1 12 First Set of Call Types to Include Together E Unknown a E E Incoming Conference Second Set of Call Types to Include Together Select All E Incoming Abandoned E Incoming Abandoned Voice M E Incoming Transferred i ncoming Abandoned E Incoming Abandoned Voice M E Incoming Transferred Select None Interval Day of Week Month of Year 7 Week of Year Day of Year Day of Month Hour of Day Half Hour of Day Minute of Hour 4 selecting the call type sets and Interval Chapter 14 28 Reporting Ordering the results Interval Day of Week Order Report Output By Interval a Number from First Call Type Number from Second Call Type Maximum Ring Time from First Call Type Maximum Ring Time from Second Call Type Maximum Duration from First Call Type Maximum Duration from Second Call Type Average Duration trom First Call Type I Prev WW Setting the order of results Ordering of the resulting report can be adjusted by selecting one of the order by
42. clicking Open On the Import Callers window click Load to populate the Users to Import list box with any valid entries from the CSV file that have been found Further editing is possible in the grid before committal Click OK Chapter 9 10 Callers Chapter 1 O Callers Introduction to Callers SEE 2 Caller Groups E 46 All Business Callers oe 46 All Callers fe Me All Personal Callers i Unassigned Callers Within MyCalls people or companies external to the organisation that you call or who call you are referred to as callers Callers can be categorised by a type as either e Business Callers e Personal Callers e Unassigned Callers Callers can also be placed into user groups so all the contacts within a particular company can be grouped together Personal numbers can also be placed into a user group such as Terry Breen s Personal Callers Setting the type of caller and placing them into a user group allows reports to be generated that are filtered to only show those callers and thereby identifying if someone is taking or making too many personal calls The callers configuration screen can be shown by selecting the Callers option from the Configure menu or by pressing the callers icon from the main toolbar Creating and editing callers How To Creating a new Caller SEEs 2 Caller Groups 46 All Business Callers Ha All Callers fe 46 All Personal Callers
43. cost for the number or the call handling cost for that number e Summary All Calls Provides a summary of the volumes and handling times of different call types for any given type of device e Summary All Calls by Costing Type Provides a summary of the volumes and handling times of different call types for any given type of device e Summary All Calls by Extension Provides a summary of the volumes and handling times of different call types for all the members of a group for any given type of device grouped by extension usage e Summary All Calls by Trunk Provides a summary of the volumes and handling times of different call types for all the members of a group for any given type of device grouped by trunk usage Weekly Reports e List Most Dialled Numbers Provides a list of numbers that were most frequently dialled or answered The list can be filtered to a specific type of call such as incoming or abandoned or to devices such as the extension group that handled the call or the trunk group All the device types can be used to provide very detailed filtering The results can then be ordered by the total length of calls for that number the call cost for that number or the call handling cost for that number e List Most Frequent Incoming callers Provides a list of callers that were most frequently dialled or answered The list can be filtered to a specific type of call such as incoming or abandoned or to devices such as the extension gr
44. group The information included on the report is user selectable along with the headings and widths of the columns used to display the information Custom Call Details Daily Costs by Telephone Number Created On 16 11 2008 1124 31 Covering Pernod 16 11 2006 00 00 00 to 22 11 2008 23 59 59 Report Filtered To Include all matching items in the report Report grouped by Dialed Number Report ordered by Time of Call Transferred calls are being reported as a single call Time Of Call Call Type Number Duration Call Cost 18 11 2008 09 40 05 Inc 00 03 46 0 00 Totas 00 03 46 0 00 Total Calls 1 02476319100 18 11 2008 10 45 23 Inc 02476319100 00 00 58 0 00 Totals 00 00 55 0 00 Total Calls d 07974162117 1811 2008 09 33 21 Inc 07974162117 00 02 18 0 00 Totals 00 02 18 0 00 Total Calls 1 Totals 00 07 02 0 00 Total Calls 3 Daily Incoming Abandoned Calls Provides a list of detailed abandoned calls that are grouped by a specified device type such as extension or account code The report can be further filtered so it only applies to a certain range of devices such as a specific extensions group or organization group The information included on the report is user selectable along with the headings and widths of the columns used to display the information Custom Call Details Daily Incoming Abandoned Calls Created On 16 11 2008 11 21 54 Covering Pernod 18 11 2008 00 00 00 to 18 11 2008 23 59 59 Report Filtered To Only include call
45. here the number of account codes you wish to create in the range Start Account Code Number Enter the number to start your account code range from here This must be the starting number for a valid account code range configured on your telephone system Account Code Group You can select an account code group to group this range under The values in this list are configurable under Account Code Groups The default value is set to None Click OK A block of account codes will now have been inserted into the Configured Account Codes list box You should configure these account codes with appropriate names and groups using procedures described later in this topic before clicking the OK button to complete your account code creation process Note that the account code numbers you create should correspond to those configured in the telephone system How To Editing existing Account Codes 1 From the MyCalls Telephone System Configuration screen click Account Codes 2 Click Create or Edit an Account Code in the Account Codes configuration area 3 Inthe dialogue box that appears click the Edit button to the right of the account code you want to edit 4 Inthe second dialog box that appears configure a Name for the account code and if required select an Account Code Group FBX Code Number Head Of ice 110 Mame Account Code Group White Goods None 5 Click OK 6 Repeat these stages f
46. hourly rate You can copy a value to multiple account codes by right clicking the mouse button and copying then selecting and pasting onto the other account codes 6 Click OK Editing DID Handling Costs DID handling costs are used to specify pro rata hourly rates that will be applied and charged for a DID number whilst handling a call How To Editing DID Handling costs 1 Select the Costs option from the Configure menu or click the icon on the toolbar 2 Expand the Handling Costs category in the left pane of the window This will display all available PBXs in your enterprise Expand the PBX you want to configure the costs for 3 Click the DID Costs option 4 Click Edit DID Handling Costs Number Name Hourly Cost 400 0 00 401 4 0 00 001 0 00 3343 fete 0 00 Chapter 12 10 Call Costing This window will list all DID numbers along with their DID names and their DID groups as set through the telephone configuration or auto learned from the PBX In the Hourly Cost column you can assign per DID a pro rata hourly rate You can copy a value to multiple DIDs by right clicking the mouse button and copying then selecting and pasting onto the other DIDs Click OK Editing Pilot Number Handling Costs Pilot number handling costs are used to specify pro rata hourly rates that will be applied and charged to a pilot number whilst handling a call How To Editi
47. in each case Individual statistics are arranged under the menu options e Extensions e Users e DIDs e Pilot numbers Available statistics Once you have created your statistics window you can view a wide range of values by selecting the value from the column chooser This gives a list of columns which can be dragged across to the statistics window The available statistics are as follows Average incoming duration Average duration for incoming connected calls Average outgoing duration Average duration for outgoing connected calls Chapter 6 6 Real Time Statistics Average total duration Average duration of all calls Average overflow duration Average duration for overflow calls Overflow calls are waiting calls which have been moved from one ACD queue to another Average overflow wait time Average wait time for overflowed calls Average abandoned call wait Average time which incoming abandoned calls were prepared to wait Average incoming call wait Average time which incoming connected calls were prepared to wait Average ring no answer RNA call wait time Average time which incoming calls had to wait before being answered when the intended extension did not answer in time and the call had to be forwarded to an alternative extension Long Abandoned wait Number of abandoned calls where the ring time exceeded the ABD Ring abandoned ring time defined in the Grade of Service for that spec
48. measure queue performance and allow dynamic control of agent activities Alarms Enable you to be alerted to problems continuously monitoring the system Where do I start Chapter 1 2 Welcome to MyCalls MyCalls like any sophisticated software application is very configurable To make full use of your investment in this software you will need to plan how you are going to use it for maximum effectiveness To make this easier we have compiled this introductory section to help you get the most from the application To make decisions regarding which information will be of most value you need to match up the MyCalls capabilities to your business activities Obviously a small sales business will have very different requirements to a large call centre This introductory guide will help you make decisions as to what information is of most value to your particular business Firstly we will look at the types of business activities you may be involved with and then point you toward the features of most benefit to you Phone system Calling back missed Complaints l opportunities handling overview Configuring Devices Mainly Incoming Generating New business Staff focus Customer retention How do organise my phone system to get the Fast response best from a call manager hat type of business are Both What do want to improve system you in Company image Mainly Outgoing Campaign Management Are your staff
49. more of the following types of distribution mechanism e Email e Computer e Process Chapter 11 15 Alarms Email Email Addresses somewhere somewhere com n admin Sext com reception ext com mI Email Address someone somewhere com Make sure that you have set up the mail server configuration correctly in the Operational Settings See Operational Settings Each email address added will get an email describing the alarm condition that has been broken including the current parameter value and the trigger point value For example a system alarm that monitors free disk space and triggers when it is lower than 10GB would send a mail Subject MyCalls Real Time Alarm lt Alarm Name gt The free hard disk space on your system drive has fallen below 10GB 7GB Computer Target Computer Names reception a admin sales rye oll Sal ee t Target Computer Name Each computer name entered will receive a net send broadcast message describing the alarm condition that has been broken Windows XP Service Pack 2 disables the messenger service by default If you wish to use this distribution method on your corporate network and you have XP Service Pack 2 installed on any of the computers that will receive the message you will need to discuss your requirements with your IT department Chapter 11 16 Alarms Process Process Names pageralert exe r Process Mame Any number of external applications can be invok
50. of the extension group Delete Extension Group Use the Delete Extension Group wizard to delete the extension group 3 You will be prompted to confirm deletion of the selected group 4 Click OK J P icr tip When a group is deleted all of the member devices of that group will have their user defined group set to none When a group is deleted all of the member devices of that group will have their user defined group set to none Alarms will be deleted if they are configured to a group that is going to be deleted System groups cannot be deleted Chapter 8 26 Telephone System Configuration You can also remove a device from a group How To View or Edit group membership From the MyCalls Telephone System Configuration screen click Extension Groups and select the group you want to configure Click View or Edit the Group in the Extension Group configuration area In the dialog window that appears you will see a list of group members which have already been created alternatively you can create new members for the group by clicking on the Add new extension button and creating a new member directly in the group Each group member will show details of the member for example extension number name device type group and whether or not real time statistics are enabled Drag a column header here to group by that column Number Name Type Group Enable Statistics 2817 mike Digital Desk Phone
51. organisation group If you have sub groups below this group then you can include those members by selecting the Include Sub Groups option If members are displayed in this window then you can choose whether to collect real time statistics on the member in the group by selecting the Enable Statistics option Hame Jrganisation Group Members Ore Name Ena ble Statistics adminstrator E Include Sub Groups 4 Click OK Chapter 9 4 Organisation and Users Deleting Organisation Groups How To Delete Organisation group configuration 1 From the Organisational Configuration screen click to expand Organisation 2 Select the group you want to delete e g office admin Ser Organisation bait Office admin E H Customer service administrator Met 3 Click Delete Group in the Organisational Group configuration area 4 You will be prompted to confirm deletion of the selected group 5 Click OK User Configuration Users are generally people employed by the organization By configuring users it will be possible to report on the activity of people rather than extensions This is very useful where a person may move between several desks and telephones How To Creating a new User At the Organisational Configuration screen click Create a New User The Create a New User screen is displayed In the dialog window that appears a number of fields are available for entry
52. others are optional inputs as outlined below FEX Code Number of Extensions Head Office 1 z Start Extension Number Type Unassigned Extension Group None 4 Number of extensions Enter here the number of extensions you wish to create in the range 5 Start Extension Enter the number to start your extension range from here 6 Extension Group You can select an extension group to group this range under The values in this list are configurable under extension Groups The default value is None 7 Click OK How To Editing existing Extensions 1 From the MyCalls Telephone System Configuration screen click Extensions 2 Click Create or Edit an Extension in the Extensions configuration area 3 Inthe dialog box that appears click the Edit button to the right of the Extension you want to edit Number Name Type Group User Enable Statistics 208 208 Unassigned None None Edit 235 Reception Digital Desk Phone Sales John Edit 23 236 Unassigned None None a Edit 4 Inthe second dialog box that appears configure a Name for the Extension and if required select an Extension Group and Extension Type PEX Code Number Head Office 208 Mame Detault User 208 None Type Extension Group Unassigned Mone Voice Mail Timeout Seconds Chapter 8 13 Telephone System Configuration Click OK Repeat these stages for as many Extensions as you need to config
53. over the window The window can be adjusted in height by hovering over and clicking the upper part of the window with the mouse and then dragging the window vertically Adjusting the column width Dragging a column divider with the mouse allows the column to be sized horizontally Ordering by column Selecting the column title will cause the grid to be ordered by that column s content e g clicking on a number column will sort the contents in ascending numerical order clicking on a name column will sort the items in ascending alphabetical order of the name column Grouping by column Dragging a column to the grouping area Drag a column header here to group by that column will group records on that column To ungroup simply drag the column name outside the window Drag a column header here to group by that column Date Time PBX From Device To Device 22 09 2008 11 32 Head Office 049 Line 049 The screen shot below shows grouping by the date time column Chapter 3 5 MyCalls User Environment Date Time Date Time PBX ate lime AOA O 22 09 2008 12 01 Head Office 22 09 2008 12 01 Head Office E D IAJN Head Office Date Time 22 09 2008 2209 2008 12 01 Head Office Column Chooser Allows the grid to be customized by adding and removing different columns Top add a column select it from the column chooser list and drag it to the grid To remove a column drag it from the grid and release th
54. queue status window will be displayed on the screen showing the current status of any users logged into the queue Call States As calls are made to the incoming pilot number the activity of the users can be viewed The possible states are Available Other ACD 0 SReGeeeeeschessdeneeGnotresees eee SSReOCE Tone Sa anaeeanenrrsenscnensenoneerenecsenaniasonrtnensceensesoustrenecsenacseneurtnensseauseseneerenecsenansenenrtnenscnensesouscrsnersenansenenrtnenscsenserensrtenecssnanneenrtnenseseneessuserenenssnanseneurtnenacseneurensrrenenssnansenenttseuaesencesousersnenssnansenenseseuecsencesoneetreenssnausenenerseuansareerenenrsnenssnanseresecsenacsencsstnentsns Off Hook 1 Ringing 0 Other ACD 0 Cs iecekisadinciveruiesiaveticetiesitersiviste viteniinciistitirisvedivaitariterdtvGan siivatineitcviiseisredisniiesiturdicebiwte aiineiisritevisretivnitusiteriireieetivalintel sitsniaresivaitvsitertivaiteviteniineiicritenitet sitevitevritvsiterttveiisctistiivniisSnsdeiteriteriivaiissitentineiisridvndiresi ste Widevead detalles Miankkaadkandainai DES Urabe ie titi eii it ii tet ee tere eee eee eee rere ee eer errr reer er eeer i retere ret re tree ee treet eee eee eee eee ee eee eee eee ee eee ere eee eee eee eee eee eee eee eee eee eee eee eee eee eee eee eee eee eee eee eee eee eee eee eee ee reer eee eee eee Hold 1 Other ACD 0 GDN SAN RD BAD SEAN SR EDEN SR BE SAD RSE RE SENSE RN SENSSEE SRL SIE SSE SPIN SB
55. real hierarchy and provide more flexibility than devices alone including the ability for a user to log into any extension hot desking and the ability to control the access to call recordings Using DIDs to recognise purpose of calls Breaking down calls according to the purpose of call can be achieved by providing DIDs to your callers Advertising campaigns often use this approach where a series of DID numbers are advertised each number corresponding to a different advert or product range The phone system can then route calls coming in on a given DID to a specific group of extensions or an ACD queue If several calls dialling the same DID are waiting to be answered they are defined as being in a DID queue and MyCalls can provide statistics about these queues such as calls waiting in queue longest wait who answered the calls and what the call durations were etc Managing calls using Automatic Call Distribution ACD ACD allows the distribution of calls to a group using a set of rules and generally ensures that calls are spread around in a fair and even manner This ensures that no individual agent is answering calls more frequently than others MyCalls can monitor the performance of ACD queues and break down call rates the number of calls in a given period and performance such as time to answer and service levels Agent control allows supervisors to manage which agents are logged on to which queues at any given time and allows the monito
56. specific destination which is considered to be unauthorised Chapter 11 2 Alarms Caller Alarms These alarms are used to determine if a caller has been contacted within a specified time period Queue Status Alarms These alarms are used to determine the acceptable number of calls in a queue and also the acceptable amount of time that a call can remain in a queue before being answered User Status Alarms These alarms are used to determine the maximum allowable number of times a user may go into each of the Unavailable Wrap up DND states in a logged on period Also determines the maximum length of time a user is allowed to remain in that state Viewing the alarms When an alarm is triggered an alarm record is generated and stored in the database These can be seen in the Alarms Real Time list View See Real Time List Views An alarm icon is also displayed in the system tray when an alarm is triggered This icon will remain in the system tray until the alarm window has been clicked with the mouse button to indicate it has been viewed Audible alarms Audible alarms can be configured on a severity level Information Warning Severe Critical When an alarm is triggered if a sound has been assigned to the severity of the alarm then that sound will be played The sound can be configured to be played repeatedly until either an alarm of a higher severity is triggered or until the alarm window has been clicked on with the mouse
57. think and you may need to either answer the phone quicker or employ more people If the alarm is triggered because the average has risen above the maximum value then your customers are prepared to wait longer than think they will and you may not need as many people to answer the calls Incoming Call Time Alarm These alarms can be set to trigger if the average time taken to handle incoming calls over the last hour was too low or too high Overflowed Call Time Alarm These alarms can be set to trigger if the average time taken to handle overflowed calls over the last hour was too low or too high Outgoing Call Time Alarm These alarms can be set to trigger if the average time taken to handle outgoing calls over the last hour was too low or too high General Service Level Alarm These alarms can be set to trigger if the average service level over the last hour was too low or too high Setting a maximum value of 99 rather than 100 can be useful a 100 value can mean that the people handling the calls are not fully occupied A definition and configuration guide to Service Levels is covered under Grade of Service configuration Abandoned Service Level Alarm These alarms can be set to trigger if the average abandoned service level over the last hour was too low or too high It is quite normal to have a minimum value of 97 and a maximum value of 100 It is widely accepted that you should not expect to have more than 3 of your calls
58. throughout the day you will need to be able to respond quickly to fluctuations in requirements Agent Control is one way you can do this directly from your MyCalls screen call Queues Call queues are queues within the PBX switch which can hold incoming calls Prior to being placed in a queue a call may go via one of the following routes e The callis answered by an auto attendant which will direct the call to the most appropriate queue by asking the caller to enter a series of digits from the handset e The caller may have dialled a DID number which is automatically associated with a call queue e Alive receptionist may route your call to a queue using a Pilot number A queue can be in the form of either a Hunt Group or an ACD queue Hunt groups are a defined set of extensions which will respond to calls in either a collective ring all phones ringing simultaneously or a sequential ring each phone rings in turn Collective rings can lead to indecisiveness if more than one agent is available Sequential rings can lead to longer wait times as the call has to wait at each extension in the group in turn ACD queues are more sophisticated and allow calls to be routed according to a set of well defined rules In general the rules will route calls to an appropriate extension based on who has been idle Chapter 13 1 Agent Control the longest within the group Each ACD group consists of a number of agents who can log on and off the queues a
59. title to describe the users position within the organization 8 User Role Select a user role for your user from the pre defined list 9 Email Address You can enter an email address for your user so that if they are configured as an Administrative User of an organization group then they receive reports and alarms on that groups activity directly 10 Password If the user is required to enter a password to login then enter one in here 11 Enable Call Playback If the user is going to need to listen to recorded conversations then they will need to enable this option to do so 12 Enable Real Time Statistics For real time statistics to be collected for the user this option needs to be enabled If you no longer with to collect info on the user then turn this option off 13 Once you are happy with the changes you have made click OK Chapter 9 7 Organisation and Users How To Deleting a User From the Organisational Configuration screen expand organisation Select the group that the user you want to delete belongs to and select the user Click Delete user You will be prompted to confirm deletion of the selected User Clicking Yes will delete the user whilst clicking No will cancel the action If you have configured User Groups then you can group individual users within a group to enhance real time statistics and make reporting easier The easiest method to assign a user is to simply drag and dro
60. to enhance real time statistics and reporting Caller groups are created by users and tailored to the organizations requirements Default is set to None 10 Notes Use the notes field to log any useful information about the caller for other users to see 11 Click OK 12 The caller should now be visible in the caller list of the Edit Callers window How To Editing an existing Caller 1 From the Callers Configuration screen click Create or Edit a Caller 2 Inthe Edit Callers window that appears click the Edit button to the right of the Caller you want to modify 01606 Billy Business None Edit 01666 Mart Business 7 None Edit 01676 Bruce Business None Edit 3 Inthe Edit window that appears you can modify the following fields Alternate Number Name Chapter 10 2 Callers Type Caller Group and Notes You cannot change the Number field as this is the main identifier of the caller To change this you would have to create a new caller record and delete this record if necessary Number 01606 Alternate Number Name Billy Type Caller Group Business None Click the OK button when you have completed making your changes Click the OK button on the Edit Callers window to save the changes you have made Deleting callers How To Delete a single or a range of Callers From the Callers Configuration screen click Delete a Range of Callers In th
61. to cancel any scheduled or manually started backups that are currently running Chapter 7 13 Telephone System Configuration Chapter 3 Telephone System Configuration Configuration options Before you can use MyCalls you will need to configure the application To do so you will need to gather at a minimum the following information about your telephone system Trunks The type and number of trunks connected to the PBX switches that MyCalls will be monitoring For example are your trunks ISDN BRI or PRI analogue mobile gateway etc Extensions An itemized list of extensions along with their groupings either by location or business function Ideally identify who is the regular user for each extension Default User DID Numbers If your organization uses DID numbers you will need a list of them and their function or the name of the person who will be receiving calls to that DID In most cases it is better to specify a business function to a DID e g Sales enquiries Support etc If you are planning to configure organizational information such as users and user groups then you will also need to gather information about who will be using the telephone system and how their roles are organized Chapter 8 1 Telephone System Configuration J i tip Managing devices properly Setting up devices properly can sometimes prove difficult especially if you have a large configuration to deal with Some tips for finding and managin
62. values This means that the results are no longer determined by the time interval but by the field specified in the group by box This can result in confusing results if you are not aware of the purpose for the ordering If you were to select Max Ring Time as the order by column and Day of week as the interval then the first result in the report will be the day of week with the longest total ring times recorded This means that the days of the week will probably appear out of order as example below Call Summary over same Interval Created On 23 10 2008 16 31 28 CoveringPeriod 01 08 2008 00 00 00 to 30 08 2008 23 59 59 Report Filtered To Call types used for first value set are Incoming Call types used for second value set are Incoming Abandoned Report grouped by Day of Week Report ordered by Maximum Ring Time from First Call Type Transferred calls are being reported as a multiple calls Incoming Incoming Abandoned Num of Max Ring Avg Ring Max Avg Num of Max Ring Avg Ring Max Avg Interval Period Calls Time Time Duration Duration Calls Time Time Duration Duration Saturday 3 156 00 06 15 00 00 18 01 23 41 00 02 32 638 00 05 01 00 00 57 00 00 00 00 00 00 Tuesday 5 657 00 06 05 00 00 16 01 06 46 00 02 28 584 00 04 36 00 00 40 00 00 00 00 00 00 Thursday 4 474 00 05 31 00 00 15 01 02 56 00 02 28 423 00 05 55 00 00 46 00 00 00 00 00 00 Monday 4 807 00 04 20 00 00 16 00 46 10 00 02 21 778 00 10 58 00 01 07 00 00 00
63. view of Average Wait Time 24 hour Chapter 6 3 Real Time Statistics Combination Value windows Combination value windows provide graphical representation showing call volume histograms and the maximum and minimum number of calls mapped against average values Combination values can only be displayed for historical statistics i e daily and 24hour and can display min max bar charts for each hour and a line graph overlay showing the average values over time Answered Calls We Minimum Wart 4 Maximum Wait 11 at 11 00 Time Answered Calls Answered Average Average Average Wait 7 5 at 11 00 Time The Combination values work best when looking at and comparing different call types such as Outgoing and Incoming calls op eet eee ee oes Time m Outgoing BB Abandoned B Incoming Chapter 6 4 Real Time Statistics Manipulating the Graphical displays Single value and Combination value windows can display results in graphical format These graphs are easily manipulated to allow you to zoom into the area of interest as follows How To Manipulate the graph 1 The original graph as seen above shows the activity over a 24 hour period from midnight to midnight Generally the data you will be most interested in is during your working hours for example from 9 till 6 MyCalls allows you to zoom in on these areas so that you don t get a lot of space where there s no activity 2 To zoom i
64. you to select the period over which the statistics are calculated Historical statistics These statistics are calculated differently depending on how you select the period Daily calculates a daily accumulated value or average which is reset each day at midnight Hourly Calculates accumulated or averaged statistics for each hour of the day All values are reset at midnight Current statistics Last Hour These values are calculated as a rolling statistic over the previous 1 hour period for example if the time is currently 14 30 then the current value calculated will be that value between 13 30 and 14 30 Types of Real Time Statistics window There are three basic types of real time statistics accessible via the real time information menu Real Time Statistics Grid View windows Single Value windows and Combination value windows aa Real Time Status Boy Real Time Statistics Hie Single Value ngm Combination Values Chapter 6 1 Real Time Statistics Real time statistics Grid View windows display a user defined selection of real time single value Statistics for one or more devices or groups Single value windows show an individual statistic in either a Numerical or Graphical format Combination value windows show comparative statistics of different statistics on the same graph Grid View Statistics windows Select View gt Real Time Information gt Real Time Statistics from the MyCalls menu This ty
65. 00 00 16 00 00 50 89 21 77 39 14 954 35 5 88 Head Office Will None 37 1 00 00 07 00 00 09 2 63 2 04 72 83 58 82 System Reports Alarms Raised A list of Alarms raised during the reporting period can be filtered by PBX Auto Configured Devices Created On 24 10 2008 15 38 06 CoveringPeriod 01 08 2008 00 00 00 to 24 10 2006 23 59 59 PBX Type Date Number Name PBX Record Extension Head Office Extension 01 08 2008 14 15 55 01606 9979978 Dave Simmons 4A1IVOT 14 09 065 00 05 44 Auto Configured devices A simple report showing all automatically configured devices during the reporting period Auto Configured Devices Created On 24 10 2008 15 38 06 CoveringPeriod 01 08 2008 00 00 00 to 24 10 2006 23 59 59 PBX Type Date Number Name PBX Record Extension Head Office Extension 01 08 2008 14 15 55 01606 9979978 Dave Simmons 41IVOT 14 09 065 00 05 44 system Audit This report shows a record of system audit entries for the duration of the reporting period Audits are generated by the system when an event occurs such as starting or stopping of a service System Audit Created On 24 10 2008 15 44 22 CoveringPeriod 24 10 2008 00 00 00 to 24 10 2008 23 59 59 Report Filtered To Only include CPEs taurus CPE Date Category Action Result Description Who Taurus Taurus 24 10 2008 09 48 13 Application Stop Success Call Processor SYSTEM Chapter 14 23 Reporting Unused or infrequently used devices Allow y
66. 1 Organica Uon VEW ennn teed vacaesunienamenstecueeseecau sins nana vetengen seas cauienantsateuneseauaaeeenues 1 WIV COn Eure WS ONS saree caste roti 8 iain E NSS 2 Understanding WSer ROIS nenco sion a E E S N EA 2 Organisation Group CONTBUNA TON ssum TAA a A esse 3 How To Creating a new Organisation group s ssssessssssssssessrsessessesesseseessesesseseesessrsessreseseeseeseeees 3 S MyCalls Advanced Call Management System How To Editing organisation group configuration ccccceeeeccceceseccceeesccecauseceeeeeeeceeeeneceesaneeeeteas 4 Deleting OfeanisatiO Nn GrOU DS ssi cower ces eee ieee sat AA eee aed 5 How To Delete Organisation group configuration cccccceesecccccesececeesececeesececseeeeceeseneeeeeeeeeeeteas 5 WISE CONT UNA ION arskeptodicmeriiedsatces oat weyican saber cupdieGeadiueodwan sana boas sve uoadaaydoasbeiatauniiarveatiesdeanemerbensiwenseaswes 5 HOW TO Create a Mew USF cerr T E TNE 5 HOW TO BCIUING AIVeXISUIN ISOM ciiisie este eae a a aa 7 HOW TO Deleting alUSER ucria a ene eae ee 8 HOW Lo Assicning Users tO T CrOU D taieccoccseas cease encsetleacs ge cacsmutwasee vias ongesa saan ronenuedeosdacccasenetusuevemuns 8 How To Removing a User TrOni derou spcicisiccdeadsncdviave iaceboncedleancduds O 9 PVRS O ALIN WS CS p55 wrasse ecwacinaes ta cece eaes Sones dete tenuis naicedto nc ueaem vous denice edna onesdear nates detteaesdate Sheu sannmecnateniennanied 9 HOWTO IMO USE Senra tea aneegene
67. 15 42 26 Report Filtered To Call types used for first value set are Incoming Call types used for second value set are Incoming Abandoned Report grouped by Day of Week Report ordered Reporting by Interval Transferred calls are being reported as a multiple calls agg Incoming Abandoned Num of Ring Avg Ring Max Avg Num of Max Ring Avg Ring Max Avg Interval Period ae a me Time Duration Duration Calls Time Time Duration Duration Monday 4 807 00 04 20 00 00 16 00 46 10 00 02 21 778 00 10 58 00 01 07 00 00 00 00 00 00 Tuesday 5 657 00 06 05 00 00 16 01 06 46 00 02 28 584 00 04 36 00 00 40 00 00 00 00 00 00 Wednesday 4 742 00 04 12 00 00 14 00 34 32 00 02 20 379 00 06 37 00 00 36 00 00 00 00 00 00 Thursday 4 474 00 05 31 00 00 15 01 02 56 00 02 28 423 00 05 55 00 00 46 00 00 00 00 00 00 Friday 5 340 00 03 43 00 00 14 00 45 00 00 02 22 507 00 05 00 00 00 36 00 00 00 00 00 00 Saturday 3 156 00 06 15 00 00 18 01 23 41 00 02 32 638 00 05 01 00 00 57 00 00 00 00 00 00 Sunday 915 00 01 27 00 00 02 00 31 49 00 01 11 34 00 01 02 00 00 14 00 00 00 00 00 00 Configuring the call types and interval periods requires you to select two sets of call types Each set of call types can have more than one call type selected but the resulting totals will add all values for the selected call types into one total e g if you select incoming and incoming transferred these calls will be added together to produce a single total value for the
68. 16 MyCalls Advanced Call Management System Aeent Gh 0 9 ol 60 eRe rar eA Pm tao SCS OE SS SP a ee ee ee Re 17 Vane IIIA OS enaa tae ee etna aap etc tate 17 Folow p untet rned Calls renia a See 17 ANIONS outeome CAMS cercei aa A a 18 OULOT ROUIlS Operation S orea A A N aes 18 Whatrdo IWant toImprove Ofeina a 19 What typeof Stalindo have iea E E E T 20 What type of business does MyCalls Cater fOf s sssssseseesssssrnsesrrrssrrererreresssreresrereserersseereseereesseeress 20 Telemarketing Compalen N T obicneneyaneiepannataueastenbanseneeiers 21 ProlescionalseViC E miera a N bans dled esadieuesenticaeeduateters 21 BO 2 OO Gee ne ee a ee E E eer 21 MISUSE OF THE TELE D NOME Syte NMa nnn an Sisss recs easvndsaveses ted ence A Wace ed aaa canes 21 Chapter 2 THE MYCALLS SOFTWARE SUITE esessssessssesecseseosssessosecsosesecsosesecseseossseseoseseose 1 Chapter 3 MYCALLS USER ENVIRONMENT ccscsscosscsscssccsccsscsscsscnsccsscsscsscescssosscsscsees 1 LO SPINE MOTNE SV SEO I ana a a a aena 1 HOw TO Log mto the Syste Merrnin ana a a a a dee ces 1 BEEN Tig il OD ar a a a ee a E A Ta 2 Common features of real time information WINdOWS cccccccccssssesseeecccceesaaeesseeeecceceessuauseeeeeeeeess 2 Te View Menine a a a a and uuamicanevgconss 4 GU WA WS oss ri ie cae seataaain lt lss Svaaaian E macnn mane abide Gabbe iil ee htow E ane ea cee 5 Chapter 4 SCREEN LAYOUTS si ccceiicteavsiaicesuntectecp seeni aE 1 i
69. 2 30 23 00 21 30 22 00 20 30 21 00 19 30 20 00 18 30 19 00 17 30 18 00 16 30 17 00 15 30 16 00 14 30 15 00 13 30 14 00 12 30 13 00 11 30 12 00 10 30 11 00 09 30 10 00 08 30 09 00 07 30 08 00 06 30 07 00 05 30 06 00 04 30 05 00 03 30 04 00 02 30 03 00 01 30 02 00 00 30 01 00 time span Chapter 1 7 Welcome to MyCalls From the original group summary report then we can see we have to handle roughly 30 000 calls in a month of which about 3 000 10 are abandoned From our time distribution reports we can see how these calls are spread over days of the week and how the calls are spread throughout the day From this data alone we can start to estimate staffing levels and how these levels may need to be adjusted each day and throughout the day Trunk usage Knowing the quantity of calls we need to handle and when these calls are occurring is a good start for us but to give the data a bit of context it would be useful to know what the trunk usage is This helps us identify where we may be hitting bottlenecks due to insufficient trunks or conversely we may have far more trunks than we currently need The following screenshot is a portion of a trunk usage report for the same period as the previous graphs This indicates the times of day when the most trunks are in use are between 10 00 and 12 00 and between 14 00 and 16 00 This ties in with our usage graphs above but we now also know how many trunks this may be using simu
70. 22 VICWINE EVOUDS purria i n T N T e E T 23 Identifying stray devices using Unassigned groUpS essssssssssrssesrrrssrrsrrrssrrnsrresrrresrrreerresrrrserresns 23 User Defined GroupS ssssssssssssssssressssrrresrrressrrreserersssrtresererssereesetersssteresetresstereseteesesreeesetreserereseeeese 23 HOW TO Creatine a eroUDraar a nn r E NE a E EREN 24 How To Adding an existing device TO a ZFOUP ceecccssecccessececeseeceeececeueceeeeneeeeeeeeeencesaeecetseneeees 24 How To Editing devices Within a Brou D s sciedtnceszctyncdieueancudy E E A 25 HOW TO DCCC d OO UID isi nen aT a aT T a 26 How To View or Edit group membership sssssssssssenssersssresssereserssressrersesreroseeeserrssrresressererseereseers 27 Miscellaneous Conte ratio Nesna naen ANA 28 HOWTO ConNEuUnne COLOURS eenean nar a A E E A A onan 28 DY SCCM Se UINE a E S 28 HOW tO SCE UD aN EmMa SENE unna a a aa a TaN 29 How to Setup an FIP Serve siccsscrendsdisusacesusyeuesreontaecepiswucavarsunseasramedsaepants IEEE EEE ERE EER REES 29 Grade of service and Grace periods zars A salwar Polauseadaridtasaleants 30 LoDE Calls eeren a A AE ndash elguestuaanwansucieigusauetseaneramoueasseeess 30 To access grades of service and grace periods vues accsevensceelateaulal a a 30 HOW TO Conneure Grade Of SEVICE earranan a ON TA 31 PEPEO e ne eer oR eee nat nee E E A 31 Chapter 9 ORGANISATION AND USERS ccsscssccsccsscsscssccsscsscsscescssccsscnscnscescosscnsosscesees
71. All Callers Holds all callers defined in the system e All Personal Callers Holds callers that are of type Personal e Unassigned Callers Holds callers where there type has not been specified How To Creating a new Caller group 1 From the Callers Configuration screen click Create a Caller Group 2 Inthe Create a New Caller Group window that appears a number of fields are available for entry Some are mandatory fields for successful setup whilst others are optional inputs as outlined below Name Enter a name to describe the caller group you are creating Notes Enter here any relevant details you wish to save about the caller group When you have entered the necessary information click the OK button to create the caller group How To Editing Caller group configuration 1 From the Caller Group Configuration screen click Caller Groups and select the group you want to edit Click Edit Caller Group Configuration in the Caller Group configuration area ey Callers D 48 All Business Callers oe 46 All Callers ae HA All Personal Callers a HB Unassigned Callers a Reception 2 Inthe Edit a Caller Group window that appears you can enter notes to describe your selected group 3 Click OK to save your changes Chapter 10 4 Callers How To Delete Caller group configuration From the Caller Configuration screen click Caller Groups and select the group you want to
72. Costs by Most Expensive Call Provides a list of calls that are ordered by either their duration call cost handling cost ring or held times and above a certain level such as calls over ten minutes long The report can be further filtered so it only applies to a certain range of devices such as a specific extension group or organization group e List Grade of Service Provides a list of the 30 minute interval periods that did not meet the specified grade of Service e List Most Dialled Numbers Provides a list of numbers that were most frequently dialled or answered The list can be filtered to a specific type of call such as incoming or abandoned or to devices such as the extension group that handled the call or the trunk group All the device types can be used to provide very detailed filtering The results can then be ordered by the total length of calls for that number the call cost for that number or the call handling cost for that number e List Most Frequent Incoming Callers e Summary Profile All calls by Half Hour Provides a summary of the volumes and handling times for any collection of device groups split into time intervals e Summary profile ANS Abd Calls by Ring Time Lists the number of calls that have a time parameter within a specified time period By using a Ring Time Parameter on abandoned calls this report can show at what point most callers abandon their calls e Summary All Calls by Account Code Provides a summary o
73. E SSR SNS SIA IR I A SP SAD SA EEEE Chapter 13 4 Agent Control Incoming ey ms in Ringing Incoming 1 Hold 0 Other ACD 0 Mon ACD 0 Unavailable 0 Wrapup 0 Ringing 1 Incoming 0 Hold 0 Other ACD 0 Non ACD 0 Unavailable 0 Wrapup 0 l Other ACD A user is on a call from another ACD queue than the one which You are logged into This is useful if you as a department manager wants to know that a user is busy on another call and that the calling party is legitimate Non ACD this could be an intercom call or a personal call etc _ Se s Sara eb ins a fares s af es a Pilot Sti Chapter 13 5 Agent Control Unavailable shows which users are unavailable and why y Other ACD 0 Non ACD 1 Unavailable 1 Wrapup 0 John Extn Reception Code RT OO 10 Wrap up The user has finished a call and is wrapping up the call details j Wrapup 1 John Extn Reception 00 00 05 Unavailable 0 Agent control configuration There are several steps to configuring ACD and Agent control 1 Setup users Users will need to be assigned a default extension and a user role See user configuration for details 2 Assign the users an ACD login pin code This allows the users to log in to the phone system via MyCalls and makes them available to answer calls The Login code is an arbitrary code assigned to each user which informs the pho
74. File Name field as shown in the image below and then press the Save button to return to the Save Screen Layout window When you have entered the required information to save your layout press OK Once saved a layout can be reopened and used as the current layout Opening a public layout simply creates a local copy of the layout which you are then at liberty to change The changes you make to your local copy do not affect the original public layout in any way How To Opening a Public Layout You can load a public layout that a user has saved to either the MyCalls database or an external file Opening a layout will permanently overwrite your current screen layout All user types except AGENT DESKTOP users can open public layouts If you are not a AGENT DESKTOP user then you can open a previously saved Public Layout from either a server or client machine From the Layout menu select the option Load Public Chapter 4 3 Screen Layouts 4 The Load Screen Layout window will be displayed If there are layouts saved in the MyCalls database then the Load from database will be selectable but if there are not then you can only load a layout from an external file Layout Name Browse Cancel 5 Inthe Layout Name field manually enter the file path to the layout you want to load or alternatively use the Browse button to locate the file from your computer or network location as shown below using the Ope
75. Finally once you are happy with your settings you can click Finish which will save the new alarm you have created The new alarm will now appear in the Toll Fraud alarm list E Perfomance Alans a Emergency Alarms d Toll Fraud Alarms Callers Alarms Ep Status Alarms H Real Time Notifications Caller Alarms Caller alarms allow you to define an alarm that will trigger if a caller has not contacted you or you have not contacted them within a specified time The check can be made on a recurring basis as either on a specified day in a week at a specified time or ona specific day in a month at a specified time Calls that are too short in length can be excluded for example if a call was answered by voice mail or answer phone Caller Billy has not made contact been contacted using account code hite Goods ea a re on a call lasting more than ig j minutes inthe past day week month The check should be made at 12 G amp F Onl Pry the 1 day of the month Chapter 11 12 Alarms Status Alarms Status alarms are triggered if the number of calls waiting to be answered or the amount of time they have been waiting has exceeded an acceptable limit They are also triggered if a user has entered any of the rest states too many times between logging on and logging off or if they stay in a rest state for too long a period Status alarms can be set for e Qu
76. Head Office BETIK DID Statistics Name AGENT SALES A guide to the statistics of most use in real time is as follows Calls in queue CIQ these are likely to be changing quite rapidly and is most sensitive to real time changes in agent allocation Longest current wait indicates the longest waiting call in the queue This value in conjunction with the number of calls in queue can be a good indicator of current urgency If the calls in queue are growing but the longest current wait is low then the call durations are probably low thus keeping the wait times down If the wait times begin to increase then it may be indicating a downward trend and the need to increase the number of agents in order to clear the queue Service Levels Answer times Abandonment times These can all be displayed in a single group Statistics window Agent or Extension status Shows the current availability of agents or extensions On its own this is not particularly useful and needs to be displayed in context with the current queue status Chapter 1 14 Welcome to MyCalls Real Time alarms These can be used to indicate a wide variety of conditions such as when queue sizes are growing wait times are increasing or service levels are dropping and call rates exceed certain values How to group on different devices Trunks Examine overall usage of the phone system Volumes of calls through different routes e g GSM gateway ISDN pots etc Extensions
77. Head Office 001 Name Type 001 Unassigned Trunk Group Alternate Carrier Mone None 5 Click OK 6 Repeat these stages for as many trunks as you need to configure 7 Click OK to save all the changes you have made Extensions An extension station is setup to be a pre defined type A user extension would be typically setup as a desk phone cordless phone or cellular phone type A system installer also uses extensions to configure devices such as auto attendants voice mail ports and announcement ports Chapter 8 11 Telephone System Configuration Organising and Naming Extensions Creating and Editing Extensions How To Creating a single Extension 1 From the MyCalls Telephone System Configuration screen Click on Extensions 2 Click Create or edit an extension The edit Extensions screen appears 3 Click Add new extension 4 Inthe dialog window that appears a number of fields are available for entry Some are mandatory fields for successful setup whilst others are optional inputs as outlined below PEX Code Number Head Office F Enable Real Time Statistics Name Detault User None Select Type Extension Group Unassigned None 5 Number Enter the number of the Extension you wish to create This must be for a valid extension number configured on your telephone system 6 Name Enter a name for your extension to identify its use I
78. I The software hardware and programming necessary to integrate computer systems and telephone systems so they can work together seamlessly and intelligently Contacts Per Hour An outbound term that refers to the number of contacts divided by agent hours on the dialler Cost Per Call Total costs queued and variable divided by total calls 01 a given period of time Customer Expectations The expectations customers have of a product service or organization Delay Also called queue time The time a caller spends in queue waiting for an agent to become available Average delay is the same thing as average speed of answer Delay Announcements Recorded announcements that encourage callers to wait for an agent to Chapter 17 5 Acronyms amp Glossary Delayed Call A call which cannot be answered immediately and is placed in a queue DID Direct Inward Dial A service offered by telephone companies which allows the last 3 or 4 digits of a phone number to be transmitted to the destination PBX A company may for example have 10 lines but the company could publish up to 1000 numbers if 3 digit DIDs are used Each of these numbers can be assigned a purpose and routed to the appropriate extension or group Dialled Number DN The number that the caller dialled to initiate the call Dialled Number Identification Service DNIS A string of digits that the telephone network passes to the ACD IVR or other device to indicate which telephone
79. Incoming Wait Time Alarm These alarms can be set to trigger if the average wait time for answered calls over the last hour was too low or too high Answering a call too quickly can mean that you may have too many people available to answer the phone or that you customers may perceive that you are just waiting for the phone to ring It is usual for people to expect to wait 2 3 seconds before the phone is answered Chapter 11 5 Alarms Answering too late can mean that you do not have enough people to answer the phones and may risk calls being abandoned Overflowed Wait Time Alarm These Alarms can be set to trigger if the average overflow time for answered calls over the last hour was too low or too high Having too high an overflow wait time could mean that calls are being transferred between too many queues before being answered This may indicate that not enough people are answering the calls in the primary groups An alarm triggered on a low overflow wait time would not normally be used Abandoned Wait Time Alarm These alarms can be set to trigger if the average wait time for abandoned calls over the last hour was too low or too high If you base your staffing on the fact that your customers will wait a certain amount of time then this alarm can tell you if your assumptions are correct or not If the alarm is triggered because the average has fallen below the minimum value then your customers will not wait on average as long as you
80. Manage Communications MyCalls End User Manual Manage Communications Measure Effectiveness Improve Service Control Costs MYCALLS MYCALLS CALL MANAGER MYCALLS CALL CENTRE For NEC SV8100 Aspire and XN120 PBX systems and MyCalls version 2 1 0 0 MyCalls End User Manual 1 MyCalls End User Manual 2 Copyright Copyright This material is copyrighted by Kelmar Software Solutions Ltd Any unauthorised reproductions use or disclosure of this material or any part thereof is strictly prohibited and is a violation of the copyright laws of the United Kingdom Kelmar Software Solutions reserves the right to make changes in specifications at any time and without notice The information furnished by Kelmar Software Solutions in this material is believed to be accurate and reliable but is not warranted to be true in all cases Pentium is a trademark or registered trademark of Intel Corporation or its subsidiaries All other brand names and product names referenced in this document are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies Copyright 2009 all rights reserved Kelmar Software Solutions Ltd Genesys Court Denton Drive Northwich Cheshire CW9 7LU United Kingdom MyCalls End User Manual 1 MyCalls Advanced Call Management System MyCalls Advanced Call Management System WHAT THIS GUIDE CONTAINS This end user guide contains essential informatio
81. On 18 11 2008 11 37 17 Covering Period 18 11 2008 00 00 00 to 18 11 2008 23 59 59 Report Filtered To Only include call types Incoming Abandoned or Incoming Abandoned Voice Mail Include all matching items in the report Report grouped by None Report ordered by Time of Call Transferred calls are being reported as a single call Total Ring Time CallCost Handling Total Time Of Call User Call Type Duration Tir Caller Name Dialled Number Location Cost Cost Totals Calls Totals Calls Chapter 14 7 Reporting Monthly Reports e List Most Dialled Numbers Provides a list of numbers that were most frequently dialled or answered The list can be filtered to a specific type of call such as incoming or abandoned or to devices such as the extension group that handled the call or the trunk group All the device types can be used to provide very detailed filtering The results can then be ordered by the total length of calls for that number the call cost for the number or the call handling cost for that number e List Most Frequent Incoming Callers Provides a list of callers that were most frequently dialled or answered The list can be filtered to a specific type of call such as incoming or abandoned or to devices such as the extension group that handled the call or the trunk group All the device types can be used to provide very detailed filtering The results can then be ordered by the total length of calls for that number the call
82. On Unavailable Wrapup DND Interval Period Inc Abd Out Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max 01 08 2008 09 00 00 01 08 2006 10 00 00 1 2 0 1 0 q 0 0 0 0 01 08 2008 10 00 00 01 08 2008 11 00 00 3 0 1 1 2 L 1 0 01 08 2008 11 00 00 01 08 2008 12 00 00 5 1 1 2 2 0 1 0 1 0 01 08 2008 12 00 00 01 06 2008 13 00 00 2 2 2 2 2 0 q 0 1 0 0 01 08 2008 13 00 00 01 08 2008 14 00 00 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 0 0 0 0 01 08 2008 14 00 00 01 06 2006 15 00 00 2 0 2 2 2 1 1 0 0 0 0 01 08 2008 15 00 00 01 08 2008 16 00 00 3 0 5 2 2 0 0 0 0 0 01 08 2008 16 00 00 01 06 2006 17 00 00 4 0 3 1 2 0 0 0 0 0 01 08 2008 17 00 00 01 08 2008 18 00 00 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 01 08 2008 18 00 00 01 08 2008 19 00 00 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Chapter 14 21 Reporting Performance Reports Grade of service Group detail This report shows a breakdown of the percentage of groups which met or exceeded target grade of service for duration and abandoned calls in half hour intervals throughout the reporting period Device Type Target Grade of Service a0 Target Abandoned Grade F All Analog Trunks of Service E Al ISDN Trunks Select All 50 E All Private Wires F All G Sig Trunks E All TCP IP Trunks Select None All Trunks E Unassigned Trunks hi Grade of Service Group Detail Created On 2410 2008 15 24 39 Covering Period 01 08 2008 00 00 00 to 06 08 2008 23 59 59 Report Filtered To Show the intervals that did not meet the GOS
83. PBX as part of an ACD system Queue status windows can either give information for a specific queue e g All Trunks or Sales DID this is known as a queue status window Alternatively you can view one or more groups of queues in a single window This is known as a queue group Status Queue status A real time queue status window represents a statistic calculated in real time as each event is processed for a given device i e DID Pilot number or Trunk These windows are displayed as a current value such as the number of calls waiting to be answered at this moment in time Chapter 5 6 Real Time Status Longest Call Waiting 00 00 00 The method for creating queue status windows is the same for DIDs Pilot numbers and Trunks The following is an example for the DID configuration How To Configure a DID queue status window 1 From the View menu select the option for Real Time Information or select the _ icon from the main toolbar 2 Expand the Real Time Status section by clicking the to the left of the text and then expand the DIDs section Highlight the Queue Status option by clicking it and in the right side of the window 3 Click the task Create a New Queue Status View 4 The Real time queue status configuration screen will be displayed Real Time Queue Status Configuration Ea Select the device group to view The status is filtered to show only values for the type you have s
84. S mmary time DIO MIC samisena a A A 32 Special Usage REDONS crisa a hiiedabane eat cctv cant does at eas cia baledebetees 32 CUS POR RE POL tens caktcaclet seactaiee tessa ae asain tees eaters ar ieeact amines A 35 What Isa CUSTOM REDOT accessor iedecectns teaser ers associates tases acre fas ee eae ee ea 35 HOW TO Setup a Custom REDON vss ack saccncesseecesaiccadce R O 36 Custo Report Parameter Serea a N E 37 Custom Report Parameters fall into the following main categories ssssssssseesessrresssrrresrrrresreress 37 Custom S mmary Reports Call DUFATIONS onesna ean a N 38 Call DUrations General asai naan a N TAAA 38 CallDu urations Tine to ANSWe iscsi a E N 39 Custom Summary REDOItS COSTS ei N O T E E 39 E e EEE AE IE E rn E E EE re rer E EN T EATE EEEE E ATE 39 Category Counts Category Totals Category Averages ccccecccssccceseceenestenseeeeceeeecesenseteuseeeeeeees 39 CustOMm SuUMMary REDOFS Calll COUNTS uasa Tensta totale a n 39 Rine DIS CHOUEIOINS aeeueicanor te E E E E E 40 Custom Summary Reports Call Count Percentages cccccesccceeccsesceencececeeeceteuseeeeseeeeeeeneeteness 40 Custom Summary Reports ACD USESS ccccccesseccceeessececeesececeeeecececeeseceeeeseceeseneceeesseecessunecesseees 40 Custom Summary Reports PErfOrMance ccccccsecccceseccceseccceseceeseceeeecseeecseeuseeeeneeeseueceeeueseeeneeens 41 Custom Detailed Reports GENea basarrian aa aa erates in Pare ae ee ne e
85. SALES E Edit 2968 Tony Digital Desk Fhone SALES Edit 5 You can edit the Device Name Type Group Enable statistics You can also edit the default user for the device by selecting the Edit button Changing the group will remove the device from this group once the OK button is selected Chapter 8 27 Telephone System Configuration Miscellaneous configuration How To Configuring colours 1 The colours can be changed to represent the various extension states and call types 2 To change the colours click Configure gt Colours 3 To alter the colours click Edit next to the section you wish to change for example logged off end colour Colours status Call Type Start Color End Color 3 Edit Edits it Available PROrreee reer eeee eee eeee eee Abandoned Unavailable Single Value Parameters 6 Coloured Text Coloured Background 4 Click OK 5 Colours apply to all users and are system wide Colours for different call types tend to be similar Reds for abandoned Greens for incoming Blues for outgoing Neutral colours for ACD and User related status System settings In order for reports and alarms to be distributed to various people in your organization you will need to configure one or more mechanisms to transport the information to the intended recipient NB You will normally require the assistance of an IT administrator to set up syste
86. Secs loop F fa E j x a _ Forward Loop 10 Secs Playback Finding Recorded Calls For fast retrieval of calls for playback you can use the quick search from the calls grid options Quick search is the easiest way to find a call by CLI DID or Extension Quick Search From the view menu click Call record view The quick search is highlighted below by default it shows the last 50 calls for today To change the date to search on select from the list in the Period drop down menu To enter specific dates choose custom and enter your dates and times as required The next line down allows you to search for a particular telephone number DID and extension You can enter partial numbers to search on e g 01270 would find any number containing 01270 Entering both a Number DID and an Extension will search for calls containing all items in the one call You can also choose which call types to include and the maximum number of calls to display Once you have selected your criteria click the refresh button to update the view Chapter 7 7 Call Recording If you cannot see the quick search click options in the call records view and select Quick Search from the options Exporting Call Recording files If you click the export button you can save a recorded file as either wav or wma format Note that files saved in wav format will be far greater in size than wma files Ente
87. Unavailable Code Group selected defines the unavailable codes available to the user Eac PBX Code Name Head Office Sales and Retums Users Type part of a name here ml Included users Mark Organisation a F max Office admin ACD Queues Available ACD Queues Included ACD Queues Name Primary Login Returns E Unavailable Code Group T Allow User Login W Allow User Wrapup Sales Agents FJ Allow User Unavailable OK Cancel Chapter 13 11 Agent Control Select the required ACD queues from the Available list and add them to the Included ACD Queues list Select the Unavailable Code Group appropriate for this group of users Select whether to Allow user login Allow User Unavailable Allow User Wrapup These options limit these options for users within this Agent Control group Click OK to save your settings That should complete the Agent Control configuration and you should now be able to log into the ACD system Chapter 13 12 Reporting Chapter 14 Reporting MyCalls provides a comprehensive reporting facility The reports can be run manually or scheduled and automatically distributed Whilst having on screen statistics is useful for daily activities for more detailed planning and monitoring you need to use the reporting engine When to run reports MyCalls offers a large selection of pre defined reports that can be configured to look at every aspe
88. V CES an a A aA a nese de Guo sean 8 EE a E S N T 8 Organising ana Naming IrUNKS arrien a a a 8 Assigning and grouping TrunkS s sssssssesssseessersssrssserssrrsssersseresseressrsssresserreseresseesserssereseeeesseesseee 9 Creatine and edine TONKS soe va aa Spas ences cn ten N A 9 HOW TO Creatine a SINGle LrUNK oiea A ONT OTN 9 Creatine a tange of ITTUNK senan a a woaaeadaduedtnaneaettubeauindetuedinns 10 HoW To Creatine atange of TrUNKS ooeisssioeeaianesi an a T 10 EditiNE ExStinNE TUNK ocna a mun goacsamaenaatu tinea aeedeeeasee 11 HOW TO ECITINGOxISHING TTUNKS anakatrin N N 11 EXEGIISIONS sonna a a A a oats 11 Organising and Naming EXtE SIONS acusen a tana N inane dese seed deawealanenivvanes 12 Creating and EditINE EXTENSIONS J2s15sca abesecol ans a T 12 How To Creating a single EXteNnSiOn ccccssecccsssecccsscccesceceececeneeceeenceseeeceseneceeeneeesecessugecensneeees 12 How To Creating arange Ol EXtensiOns aniernerei in a a a A 13 HOW TO Editing CxIStING Extension Sarara E a AA 13 BIDS S T N T A T tana eeeneeetee cer 14 Creating and Edipe DIDS aeinn a i a a a 14 How To Creating a single DID ccssccsaccserscnsvaesanegaaxbadacdeivanswacer Ner annn E EEA EEE T E EEEE 14 How To Creatine arange Ob DIDS aa a a a a a a a 15 HOW TO Editing existing DUDS sacs aan A E O E TT E 15 Account CodES zresa nanan a a Bia lies a a a a a chad t Sisal 16 Create Edit Account CodeS uurniescnean a a a a a a a aa 16 How To Creating a s
89. a inion cued ecuueenteenaiuens 3 Agent CONTFOCOMTEUFALION sie teeter sie a abi wcasettedie a A G 6 SETUD US ES a a E E AO 6 Dynamically associating a User with an extension cccccsseccccsseccessccceececeeceeeeeeeeescesauecessueceesees 6 Creating ACD queues using Pilot NUMDETSS ssssessssssssssssnseressrrsrrrsrrssersrersrresrrnsressensreseeeseeesreeseeseerseene 7 MyCalls Advanced Call Management System Unavailable Code CONS UPatl OM rsin a a 7 How To Creating Editing Unavailable COde S cccccccccccccccccccsceeeeeceeeeeesseeseeeeceeeccceeseseeeeeeeeeeuauaegs 7 Creating Unavailable Code groups asics occa Gael lea inane a Ge la hae 8 How To Creating Editing an Unavailable Codes 2rOUP cecccccccsccceesseeececcssseueeeeeeeeeeessseusueeeeues 9 Creating Agent Control GrOUDS ecne E N ONS 10 How To Creating an Agent Control Erop cccscsscsscscscuscncesenscsecnsescustenacseoussscuscncescususeseuscneune 11 Chapter T4 REPORTING sccccssscascsnrisetuncacseusaccscnmieeieaacedseucntessauaccsstaesecieeimedeaaecsausinesaiancenenatess 1 WICH LOnRU i RODONE S55 trace sso occa A E N 1 SEIECHING WHICH NE DONS TOTUN aouen eii e E E a eee S Tisv ae ea a eae 1 Creating and Using Report items from a template cecccceeecccceeccceeccceececeuecseeeneeeeeeseseueseeeneseseens 1 The actual report templates are as FOIOWS cccccessccccesssececeeseccceeeecceeeuneceseuecessesecesseeeceesegaeeetes 1 RUMMING a report Templ
90. a that can be taken off site for security purposes The call recordings when backed up are still encrypted and can only be played using the MyCalls system The backup can be scheduled to occur at set times and split into different volume sizes for storage on to CD or DVD The split volumes create a new directory for each split and increment a number at the end of the volume name to ensure they are unique Once call recordings have been archived the system can remove the actual recording from the computer If you wish to play back a call recording that has been archived and deleted from the system you will be instructed to insert the disk that hold the archived call recording The system will then restore that call recording and can then be replayed How To Configure Call Recording Backups 1 Select the Recording Backup button from the Call Recorder Configuration Dialog Retell Voice Recorder Configuration Retell Voice Recorder Enter the machine name or IF address of the Retell Voice Recorder Enter the access password and modify the recording port or user name if necessary Finally click the Test Connection button to ensure the correct configuration details have been supplied The PBX trunks may optionally be assigned to the recorder channels Recording Server Name Password callrecorder EE Playback Port Download Speed KBits sec 5800 S000 Call Recording Backup Backup Call Recordings You can either back up all the call
91. a user has been created there needs to be at least one PBX administrator created as these are the only users that can do further modifications to the configuration If you do not create a PBX administrator then contact your maintainer who can fix it for you Chapter 9 6 Organisation and Users How To Editing an existing User 1 From the Organisational Configuration screen click Organisation 2 Select the user you want to edit by expanding the group the user is in and clicking on the user E g If you want to edit Max select Max from the organization hierarchy 3 Click Edit User Configuration in the Users configuration area 4 Inthe dialog window that appears a number of fields are available for entry Some are mandatory fields for successful setup whilst others are optional inputs as outlined below Name Abbreviation Job Title max aroue ii Office admin ae rar User Role nganisation Ofice admin ice admin Mjek Deakiog User hal Password Created By Last Modified By KELMAR SOF TWARE maxine KELMAR SOF TWARE maxine Email Address Creation Date Last Modified Date 16 10 4008 11 38 48 20 10 2008 14 05 18 Enable Real Time Statistics Enable Call Playback 5 Name Enter the users name here that will be used to identify them in the system 6 Abbreviation If the user has an abbreviated name or nickname they would like to be known by then you can enter it here in this field 7 Job Title Enter a job
92. abandon outside of the acceptable wait time Chapter 11 6 Alarms bel snsorosnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnsnnnnnnannnnsnn T nnnsnnnnnl nnana Minimum calls per hour Maximum calls per hour Trunk Group Hi Analog runt Include Extension groups Minimum calls per hour Maximum calls per hour Extension Group 0 0 z Admin E Include DID groups Minimum calls per hour Maximum calls per hour DID Group All Dy LPS A had Emergency Alarms Emergency alarms are triggered whenever a call is made to an emergency number Emergency Numbers pOSg K Trere E E Emergency Number Toll Fraud Alarms Toll fraud alarms are designed to trigger if a call has been made that breaks one of your calling policies The policies available are e Calls that are longer than a specified amount time e Calls that ring for more than a specified amount time e Calls that cost more than a specified amount of money e Calls to certain numbers or types of call e Calls to from certain caller groups e Calls that have a specific account code The toll fraud alarm can be set to be active on extensions pilot numbers and users One alarm can be set to be active on all groups a specified group or all except a specified group Chapter 11 7 Alarms Specifying an alarm to be active on all except a specified group is useful if you only want for example to have one group that can make international calls and the others cannot Specifying Outgoing Numbers
93. ailable will be either Daily or Hourly Daily will display statistics for the current day whilst hourly will display the statistics for the current hour of the day If current only is selected then the intervals available are Last hour and this is rolling time period for the previous 60 minutes from the current time 8 Interval Period After selecting the display values in instruction 6 choose the interval period from the interval period drop down list 9 Refresh Time You can set the refresh time for when you want the statistics in the window to refresh By default this is set to 60 seconds 10 You can change the style of the title and statistics fonts for the window by using either the Edit Title Font button or Edit Status Font button and configuring the various style options 11 When you have completed the configuration of your windows settings then press the OK button and your window will be placed on the currently selected layouts page Press cancel at any time to abort the setup E3 Extension Statistics Drag a column header here to group by that column Daily Column Chooser PBA Extension Name ANS Abd Out Int GOS Abd GOS Head Office 208 208 0 0 D D 00 00 00 00 Head Office 237 237 0 0 0 0 00 00 00 00 Head Office 300 300 0 0 0 0 00 00 00 00 Head Office 301 301 0 0 0 0 00 00 00 00 12 Once the window is created you can add additional columns to what is setup using the Column Chooser If you want to remove any colum
94. ailed Reports Times e Held time e Ring time e Talk time e Total duration Report Viewer Once a report has been generated it is presented in the report viewer The viewer has the following options available from its toolbar Chapter 14 42 Reporting Report Viewer a Paging m E l controls C gt A1 DnB A 100 6 Main Report Customise coer Depom Expat 400m Print Paging controls allow navigation between pages in multi paged reports Customise report Provides a number of report customisations Drill Down allows you to drill down to more detail in the report Export allows export to variety of formats including CSV Refresh Allows updating of the report Print Print the report How to create a distribution list Report Distribution Lists are the way by which a Report Schedule sends its results to the outside world You can send the results via emails and FTP servers You can also send the results to a specified folder location How To Creating a Report distribution list 1 Select the Reports option from the configure menu or click the 3 icon on the toolbar E Report Distribution Lists A Repot Templates Report tems Fy Report Schedules Select Report Distribution Lists Click Create a New Report Distribution In the window that appears enter a name and click Next Specify whether to send the reports to the system FTP server click Next Select a folder on the serve
95. ain Display The main screen for MyCalls can display any combination of real time information windows you wish to create in any position In addition to real time windows you can also view call logs and other information from the Grid Bar at the bottom of the screen AGN a a s o A Layout Configure View Reports System User Help Hagana A Defaut all Volume L All Trunks Head Office All Trunks Head Office Daily BET 15 00 16 00 17 00 Time 18 00 19 00 HMB Outgoing ME Abandoned HEM Incoming Pilot Status Window Extension Status Window Column Chooser 235 Name Reception Name Max Number 235 Available 0 Off Hook 0 Ringing 0 Incoming 0 Hold 0 Other ACD DID Pilot Caller Code Number 301 DID Pilot Caller Time Status 00 35 40 Idle Code Time 00 35 40 Status Idle Drag a column header here to group by that column Date T ime _ v PBX 29 10 2008 10 12 Head Office From Device To Device Number i User Location 29 10 2008 10 07 28 10 2008 17 53 28 10 2008 17 48 ant niannn 17 47 Head Office Head Office Head Office Lle J ie 235 Reception 235 Reception 006 006 006 006 nnr ENEN 001 001 001 001 235 Reception 235 Reception E Me emi nM 188660150964313 188660150964313 01606301 01606301 AArnewts John John
96. al call charges and or the handling charges by clicking the boxes The taxes and profits will always be recalculated Once you have altered the information click Re cost Calls Click OK Area Code Import To import new area codes or change existing ones select the System gt Area Code Import option This option will also allow you to modify the geographical coordinates for an area code if your country costs calls based on distance Vs QQ tip Only countries that are not covered by the country code 01 North America and 44 United Kingdom can be imported or edited Chapter 15 6 How To Import Area Codes 1 Click System 2 Select Area Code Import Locations Import Import or modify location area codes Edit or import area code information If the call costing for the specified country is distance based then accurate latitude longitute coordinates will be required These coordinates MUST be in decimal format Country South Africa Area Code 11115 ROSEBANK 11141 ROSEBANK 11202 KELVIN 11203 RANDJIESFONTEIN 11205 HALFWAY HOUSE 11206 OLIFANTSFONTEIN 11207 HALFWAY HOUSE 11208 KELVIN 11208 KELVIN 11210 ROBERTSHAM 11211 GRASMERE 11212 LENASIA 11213 LENASIA 11214 ROSEBANK In the window that appears Select the country you wish to import or change Select Load from Database The area codes for the selected country will be shown in the grid Either select Import or Export
97. all Types to Include This list includes a breakdown of all the possible call types available or you can simplify the list by deselecting the Show Advanced call types checkbox Alternatively you can select the three basic call types Incoming outgoing and internal by checking the appropriate Call Type Group checkbox Call Types to Include F Incoming V Incoming Conference Colort Al Incoming Abandoned Incoming Abandoned Voice Mail ee Incoming Transferred Select None F Incoming Pickup Call Type Groups E All Outgoing call types All Internal call types Configuring the call types for comparison When configuring reports which compare call types for specified intervals see next section you are asked to provide call type information for two sets of call types This is exactly the same procedure as for defining call types described above see Specifying Call types to include in a report with the additional requirement to select two sets of call type Typically you might want to compare incoming versus incoming abandoned or incoming versus outgoing Chapter 14 19 First Set of Call Types to Include Together Unknown Incoming Select All Incoming Conference F Incoming Abandoned CR Incoming Abandoned Voice M Select None Incoming Transferred The available MyCalls usage reports incl
98. all are included in the groups configured below Extensions gt Include all extensions gt Include extensions in this group Exclude extensions in this group Reception I Pilot Numbers Include all pilot numbers Include pilot numbers in this group gt Exclude pilot numbers in this group Users gt Include all users Include users in this group Exclude users in this group Customer service You can specify full or partial numbers to include in the alarm conditions At this point you are only specifying the numbers list How these numbers are used to determine an alarm condition is defined in a later step However the number list can only be used to either e Generate the Alarm if the Number appears in the list e Ignore the alarm if the number appears in the list Chapter 11 9 Alarms This means that all the numbers in the list need to have the same purpose In this case we want to generate an alarm if any mobile numbers are called or received So we specify a list of numbers which represent all the possible number combinations We specify that any numbers beginning with 07 are mobile numbers there may be other combinations of course Included Numbers 07 P In the next screen we specify any caller groups that we wish to include in the alarm conditions Again we can either specify that the alarm be generated if the calls are going to or received from the caller group or we can specify that the alarm is to
99. alls and use the resulting statistics in conjunction with call recordings to refine your campaign planning process Scheduling regular calls to existing customers Fast response to incoming enquiries What type of staff do have The telecom strategy you employ for responding to calls can be very dependent on the type of staff you employ If you provide a very specialist service or product that requires in depth knowledge then you will need to provide e Multi skilled people filling various roles e Departments geared around specific roles e Highly skilled or technical staff What type of business does MyCalls cater for MyCalls can be configured to suit any size of business from a small 5 10 extension telesales business to a nationwide network of call centres Mycalls has been deployed in virtually every market sector including Banking amp Financial Call Centres Motor Sales amp Car Hire Insurance Legal and Accounting services Retail Telesales Brokerage Hotel and Leisure Doctors amp Healthcare Airports Local Government Schools amp Educational Chapter 1 20 Welcome to MyCalls The following are just a few examples of how the software can be deployed to improve different business Telemarketing Companies In telemarketing organisations the sales or support results of individual employees can be compared to the number of calls completed In addition demographic data can be obtained from MyCalls by generating
100. alues or Average values for Chapter 14 40 Reporting e Time busy e Time DND e Time Free e Time Unavailable e Time Wrapup Login information e First Login time e Last login time e Logged in max e Logged in min e Number of logins Custom Summary Reports Performance e Abandoned Grade of service e Grade of service Custom Detailed Reports General Various parameters for which usage can be calculated e Call ID e Call type e Costing type e Grouping details e Least cost routing digits e Location name e Location state e Long call e Long wait e PBX code e Short call e Telephone number e Time of call e Total transfers e Transfers to this part of the call e User name Custom Detailed Reports Trunks Values relating to the trunk usage e Destination trunk name e Destination trunk number e Source trunk name e Source trunk number e Trunk name e Trunk number Chapter 14 41 Reporting Custom Detailed Reports Extension Values relating to the extension usage e Destination extension name e Destination extension number e Source extension name e Source extension number e Extension name e Extension number Custom Detailed Reports DIDs Pilot numbers Account codes Callers Values for these various devices e Name e Number Custom Detailed Reports Costs e Call costs e Handling costs e Overall costs e Profit e Taxes e Total call cost Custom Det
101. anaereonterenaeatis 5 Queuestatus dnd Queue SFOUD StAtUS ssie n a E eee eae O 6 Queue SUAWUISS rectal Sreae a a a a A 6 How To Configure a DID queue status wiNdOW s sessssssssesesseeressrressrrressreresserressreresereesereressereessne 7 Queue Groups Gal CUS aeaa a E E N 8 How to Create queue group status for DID groupS sssssssseesssessserrssressrerssrroseessererssrresressrersrereseeee 9 Chapter 6 REALTIME STATISTICS csceseciinc issn schicttactc ite vaawaatonsaecivccasdtncesccvevaskeatonwascescousnsentnces 1 RealTime Statistics WINGOWS eien ieun n E N N NN 1 Statistical periods and calculations arnroiisornarieri iiras nally RA atin hi eS 1 Types of Real Time Statistics WINKOW nesese iiau E A Gaatedantewhcantivancndieesuewe wean 1 Grid View Statistics WINGOWS ccccccccssssssecccccsesseccccsausecececseesseccessausseceeesssusseseessausseseessaugneeseesaas 2 Daily Hourly Single Valde WINdOWS iisas losses a a 2 Combination Value WINDOWS icicccitesesspanigres ne E R AE 4 Manipulating the Graphical displays ccccceseccccssecccscccesceceeeceeeneeeeescesaucessueceeeeueeseescessuecensees 5 HOW TO Manipulate the BLAM sic scsterce ren hiar a a tyeciandyab sete T ade soe 5 Configuring Real Time Statistics WINGOWS ccccsssecccccsseccccesececseseccceeeeeceeseusecessusecessuueeceesausecetseneees 5 Creating Grid View real time statistics WINGOWS cccccssscccssseceeeseeceesceceesceceueceseeeesecesauecessuneeens 9 H
102. ance calls at the company s expense Chapter 1 21 The MyCalls Software Suite Chapter 2 The MyCalls Software Suite MyCalls provides you with a complete set of Call Management facilities all in one package The key features of the MyCalls system include the following components Call Logging Engine The heart of the MyCalls system is its call logging engine Developed using the latest software technology it provides a modular call collection and processing engine which includes a persistent call data storage mechanism at each stage of the call logging process thus minimising potential for loss of calls even in the event of system hardware failure Display The comprehensive real time status and statistical windows available coupled with the ability to organise the screen displays into easily accessible screen pages gives you a convenient and very responsive view of the telephone system You can allocate roles to agents which can limit the screens available to them and allows you to assign unchangeable layouts to users if required Call Recording Line side call recording offers economical recording of all calls across an organisation Recording is automatic and MyCalls matching algorithms are designed to provide maximum reliability whilst maintaining a flexible mechanism for applying recording rules to suit any organisation Billing A comprehensive call costing system allows complete billing of all call and associated handling c
103. and Users Organisation view Companies are generally arranged in a hierarchical structure be it a complex one that has multiple sites divisions departments and teams or a simpler scenario where there are groups of people that are arranged in groups to reflect their functions It is possible to emulate this structure within MyCalls and then run reports and gather statistics on how different areas of the business are performing and using the telephone system The structure you create is intended to allow you to recreate business groupings rather than sometimes forced groupings when looking at the type of extension or the pilot group that the call came in on These two approaches are intended to complement each other and allow you to produce reports on exactly what you want to see The organisation is created as a series of groups and users within those groups There are no limits on the number of users groups or levels of groupings that can be created The organisation configuration can be shown by selecting the Organisation option from the Configure menu or by pressing the icon from the main toolbar FA Office admin ii ff Sales i a administrator J A All Users en ia ser ae 48 Supervisor eer PBA Administrator os Enterprise Administrator H A Agent Desktop User i 46 ACD Supervisor fi Wallboard User Under the item Organisation the hierarchical structure is shown Expand each item to see the other sub groups that form part of th
104. annot be removed Importing a Telephone bill How To Import a Telephone bill 1 Click System 2 Select Import Telephone Bill FEK Template Head Office Click edit to configure Browse Edit Browse Non PEX Phone Number Ell File Name Area Code Chapter 15 4 System Utilities In the window that appears you can import the calls that appear on an employee s home telephone bill To do this you must set up a template so MyCalls knows how to read the bill Select the PBX area code and phone number the bill is for After the bill has been processed a list of calls will be presented for approval If they are correct click the Send to Database button Click OK Chapter 15 5 Re costing calls How To Re Cost calls 1 Click System 2 Select Re cost Calls Start Date start Time 28 10 2008 00 00 00 End Date End Time 28 10 2008 23 59 59 W Re Cost the Call Charges W Re Cost the Handling Charges The taxes and profits will always be recalculated Note that re costing calls is a lengthy process It can takes up to one and a half minutes per 1000 calls Re Lost Calls In the window that appears you can re cost calls over a specified time period you may want to do this if a mistake was made entering call tariffs taxes or profit margins You can do this by altering the start end date and time Optionally you can re cost the actu
105. anual Chapter 13 6 Agent Control Creating ACD queues using Pilot numbers Within MyCalls Pilot numbers and ACD queues are effectively synonymous In order to define an ACD queue we create a Pilot number and assign it a type of ACD Queue The screenshot here shows 2 queues have been created sales and returns Soe aaa 1k nae meee a Edit the Pilot Numbers The type and user group of multiple pilot numbers can be changed by clicking the right mouse button and copying then selecting and pasting onto the other pilot numbers To edit an individual pilot number click the edit button for that pilot number Drag a column header here to group by that column Number Weis Name Enable Statistics Unavailable Code configuration There are two areas where Unavailable codes are configured Firstly you need to define the Unavailable Codes In order to use these codes you will need to define sets of Unavailable Codes which can be applied to different groups of ACD users How To Creating Editing Unavailable Codes 1 Select e System gt Unavailable codes from the menu L H Tunks A User Logins PIN Codes m Groups BE TTE Codes Chapter 13 7 Agent Control 2 Select Create or edit unavailable Codes f 5 SS ee a a ae ee Edit Unavailable Co ee ead ce 3 From the list of codes click Edit Or click Add a new Unavailable Code 4 Inthe dialog enter Code Number Name an
106. are hourly daily weekly monthly quarterly and yearly 6 Click OK Chapter 12 2 Call Costing Editing Fixed Extension Type Costs Extension types can be assigned a fixed cost The amount entered can be specified as an amount for a period defined as hourly daily weekly monthly quarterly or yearly The fixed cost amount will always apply regardless of whether or not the extension received or made any calls and will be shown on reports as a pro rata figure How To Editing fixed Extension type costs 1 Select the Costs option from the Configure menu or click the icon on the toolbar 2 Expand the Fixed Costs category in the left pane of the window This will display all available PBXs in your enterprise 3 Click Extension Type Costs 4 Click Edit Fixed Extension Type Costs Type Cost Cost Period F Cordless Phone 3 0 00 Hourly Digital Desk Phone Jet eT IP Desk Phone 0 00 aug Non PBX Phone 0 00 Weekly Operator Console 0 00 Monthly F Unassigned 0 00 Yearly 5 You can configure the costs for the different extension types configured on the system including Analogue Desk Phones Analogue System Phones Analogue User Phones Announcement Ports Auto Attendant Cordless Phones Digital Desk Phones IP Desk Phones Non PBX Phones Operator Consoles Voicemail and Unassigned extensions 6 Toconfigure a cost for an extension type enter a costing value in the Cost
107. ary levels Group details report the half hour periods where the service levels were not met Group summaries provide overall statistics for the percentage of half hour intervals for which the grade of service targets were not met Chapter 1 13 Welcome to MyCalls Real time Statistics MyCalls can display a wide range of real time statistics which can be displayed on a desktop PC or wallboard display You can organise your screens into pages and layout each page in any arrangement of statistics windows you like The statistics windows are capable of displaying either status which is the real time state of an extension user queue etc or statistics which displays accumulated values such as number of calls service levels and average Call times wait times etc Real time windows can be used to show current performance levels and call rates to motivate staff You can show calls in queue which help staff to recognise when things are particularly busy and can empower staff to log themselves onto a busy queue to help relieve the load DID Status Real Time Parameter Window Real Time Parameter Window Avg Gen S L Abandoned Calls Agent Sales Head Office Agent Sales Head Office BET BET Longest Call Waiting 00 00 00 Extension Status Window Incoming Calls Idle 3 Pee eo Ringing ea fie Links 0 Ag ent Sales Head Office T DEWP Head Office Agent Sales 0 0 Avg vale Wait Time Agent Sales
108. at call MyCalls automatically keeps a log of unreturned calls for you so that you can follow up missed calls A i tip Before you start to develop a strategy to increase the length of time callers are prepared to wait you need to be able to measure your call volumes at different times of day days of week and seasonality over the months of the year All this can be done using a variety of reporting mechanisms which Chapter 1 17 Welcome to MyCalls Mycalls provides e g Call volume analyses Line usage DID analyses call profiles over time of day day of week etc and these are all virtually one click operations using the built in report items saving you time and effort to produce very in depth information Of course you may want to distribute these reports across the organization automatically using the MyCalls report scheduler Handling outgoing calls Outgoing call metrics are clearly different to incoming There are no ring times to consider and call routing is unnecessary Timing of outgoing calls is important Picking the optimal times to make calls depends on customer behaviour and also availability of trunks from your PBX To develop the optimal call patterns you can use MyCalls reporting statistics in a variety of ways Measure call volume and trunk usage Profile Abandonment rates for outgoing calls on hourly and daily basis Compare Abandonment with durations for hour of day day of week etc Analyse call duration ta
109. ate snurre a a ncewenn acecutaceee Aaa aed en eee ee 2 How To Run a Report Template imMMediately cccceccccsssecccssecceesceceececseeceeeneeeeesceseeecessenecenees 3 Using Report HEM Sesiinae See ic dic esa aca a aes ace BE eats 3 Predefined REDOT temo cicexeisccein insect Sopninis see E EA EE E A 3 JSME REDOTCITE 1S sarar E AN E a O TTA 10 HOW TO Creatine a REDON ILE I nenene inae OR A E IN 10 HOW TO Editing A REDOC HE Mansiri A E ead ee eee ec 10 How To Creating a Report item QrOup cccccsccssccesccseceeccsecesccsecesecescssecesetseceseeseeesecaseesecaseeseees 11 How To Moving a Report item to a different SrOUP ccccccesecccecssecccceesececeeececeeeeeceeseeeeetsenecss 11 How To Copying an existing Report Item as the basis for your new REPOrt ccccseeeceeeeeeseeees 12 How To CUStOMISING a copied Report item cccescccsseecceesecceesceceeececeeseceeeueceseucesseucessueceeeneeees 12 HOW TO DElEUING a RED ORE IOI ounie a N S EN E 12 General operations for configuring report templates and report items ccecccceessecceceeseceeeeeeees 13 The REDON WIZ AN seoce an iTS eautios AEEA EON OEO 13 Serting the ReEporntiNe penod secicnsuruse ionia aa aaa a 14 LIMES tne reporclene eene a waead anne tepaescioeetes 15 Orderme Resul ssns aa a a a a 15 Gi OU WG TO Car rE A E AS 16 Filterine results oann A E E A N 17 SERENO aea a a a a E A E see seieee 20 Avala 61 Th REDON S in A E A eo 20 User Avalla
110. ays the Extension name number or user name and a visual indication of the current state for each user that is included in the view The current state of the extension or user is indicated by a colour coded indicator bar Chapter 5 4 Real Time Status Name 301 Number 304 DID Pilot Caller 304 Code Time 00 00 35 Status Internal The indicator bar can be extended to reveal additional information e Name of Extension or user e Number Number being called or calling in e DID DID that was called Incoming calls only e Pilot number Pilot number that the call was assigned to e Caller Calling in or being called e Code Unavailable code e Time Elapsed time in current state e Current status current state of extension or user Mame Reception Mame Max Number 235 Number 301 DID DID Pilot Pilot Caller Caller Code Code Tim 00 00 05 Time 00 00 05 status Ringing status Ringing Creating User Status Views How to Creating a new User Status view 1 Click Real Time Status 2 Select the output you wish to create a new user status for e g user 3 Click Create a new user status view 4 Anew dialogue window will appear Chapter 5 5 Real Time Status Organisational Groups F Organisation Office admin Organisation Sales Show Detailed Show Overview Show Summary Edit Title Font ii Edit Status Font You can s
111. be either made directly to this number or routed to this number if it is an incoming call PBX ACD A private branch exchange PBX that is equipped with ACD functionality Peaked Call Arrival A surge of traffic beyond random variation It is a spike within a short period of time There are two types of peaked traffic the type you can plan for and incidents that are impossible to predict Chapter 17 7 Acronyms amp Glossary Private Branch Exchange PBX Also called private automatic branch exchange PA8X A telephone system located at the call centre s site that handles incoming and outgoing calls ACD software can provide PBXs with ACD functionality Many refer to a PBX as a switch Queue Queue literally means line of waiting people Holds callers until an agent becomes available Queue Status Alarms Determines the acceptable number of calls in a queue and also the acceptable amount of time that a call can remain in a queue before being answered Real Time Statistics The Real Time Statistics are available on a group basis and are a summary of a selected set of the available Single Value parameters Received Call A call detected and seized by a trunk Received calls will either abandon or be answered by an agent Report Schedule A series of configured report items that will be run together at a specified time Report Template The definition that forms the basis of an ad hoc report or saved report item Ring Dela
112. be ignored if the call is to or from the specified caller group Click Next and a similar screen is displayed to allow the inclusion of a list of account code groups Having specified our groups to include or exclude from the alarms our lists of Numbers to identify and our lists of Callers and Account codes we can then specify the Conditions for the alarm based on these settings Clicking Next displays the final screen of the wizard Toll Fraud Alarm Wizard This page allows you to specify the acceptable call durations and costs that apply to the included extensions pilot numbers and users Alarm notifications will be sent if any of the alarm conditions are met and any of the number caller account code conditions are met F Include Outgoing Calls At least one of Incoming Outgoing Internal must be checked E Include Internal Calls E Alarm on calls lasting more than 15 gt minutes or E Alarm on calls ringing for more than 9 seconds or E Alarm on calls costing more than 000 Numbers Never alarm on numbers Alarm on any number or no number Only alarm if the number is in the list Only alarm if the number is not in the list Callers Never alarm on callers Only alarm if the caller is in one of the groups in the list Only alarm if the call is not in one of the groups in the list Account Codes Never alarm on account codes 5 Only alarm if the account code is in one of the groups in the list Only alarm i
113. by separating them with a comma but leaving no spaces Click OK Delete a Carrier You can delete an existing carrier at any time by following this procedure How To Delete a Carrier Select the Costs option from the Configure menu or click the icon on the toolbar Expand the Carriers option and select the carrier name of the configuration you want to delete Click Delete Carrier You will be asked to confirm deletion Click Yes to confirm No to cancel Duplicate a Carrier You can duplicate an existing carrier in order to customise its configuration settings but leaving the original configuration as it is Chapter 12 18 Call Costing How To Duplicate a Carrier Select the Costs option from the Configure menu or click the icon on the toolbar Expand the Carriers option and select the carrier name of the configuration you want to duplicate Click Duplicate Carrier Click OK Carrier Costing Periods Carriers offer different tariffs for calls dependent on the time of day the call was made The number of time bands provided by a carrier varies from carrier to carrier though there is usually some form of daytime evening and weekend rate The daytime rate tends to be more expensive as that is when most business calls are made The time bands used by carriers never overlap and together they must cover a complete week MyCalls can have any numb
114. carriers handle calls for the same Call type The carrier used is determined by the prefix entered before the number MyCalls supports both Carrier Pre Select and Least Cost Routing and any number of carriers can be configured Chapter 12 15 Call Costing Feed Costs lt Handling Costs lt Location Specific br Soe ET Business a 2 Costing Periods Ee Camier Rates iu Special Numbers its 2 Mobile Numbers Intemational Numbers Add a New Carrier How To Add a new Carrier 1 Select the Costs option from the Configure menu or click the icon on the toolbar 2 Select the Carriers option lt Feed Costs lt Handling Costs lt Location Specific br BT Business 2 Costing Periods 8 Camer Rates Special Numbers alll Mobile Numbers eg Intemational Numbers 3 Click Add Carrier in the right pane Name Country Least Cost Routing Digits United Kingdom l 18866 75143 4 Inthe window that appears you can enter a name for the carrier the country and the least cost routing digits You can enter multiple sets of least cost routing digits by separating with a comma and leaving no spaces Click OK Import a Carriers Settings You can use the import carrier wizard to import a carrier and its settings from a previously exported or created carrier file Chapter 12 16 Call Costing How To Import a Carriers setting 1 Select the Cost
115. ce is dependent on the specific report and also on the selections you make during the configuration process There area number of operations common to many of the report templates and these operations such as setting the reporting period filtering etc are described generally below All configurations of reports are accomplished via the report wizard The Report wizard Creating and editing report items will involve using the report wizard The wizard takes you through various pre defined steps and allows you to construct your report Each step deals with a distinct aspect of producing the report and whilst the details of each step will vary dependent on the specific report being produced the general type of information being configured fall into the following categories Reporting period Defines the period for which the report collates data This can be for as small a period as a few hours to a complete report covering a year or more Grouping Define the way in which the report groups the results For example you may wish to break down your report by extension or extension group you may wish to break down the report by grouping together calls of a specific type such as outgoing or incoming Consolidation of transferred calls Each segment of a transferred call either incoming or outgoing can be logged as a separate statistic When viewing a call as a whole it may be preferable to collect all the call segments and present the call stat
116. cessive personal long distance calls made by employees e Real Time here and now view of the use of the telephone system and the activities of the Staff using it Billing Hotels can take full advantage of MyCalls billing features In this environment the call accounting system can cost the calls differently for guest and administrative telephone calls Staff Monitoring MyCalls can be used to aid motivation and help improve staff performance by providing an objective measurement rather than relying on subjective impressions There are many applications for MyCalls and these systems do more than just help a company manage their call costs MyCalls can be adapted to any business environment and the growing list of features is now allowing the application to integrate with many business activities beyond the traditional role of a call management system What do I need to configure first in the MyCalls application All organizations will need to initially configure Trunks For overall performance monitoring and call volume analysis Extensions To analyse individual staff call performance Extension groups To allow analysis by department Organisation To implement call recording rules and production of reports by hierarchy of users rather than extension essential if users tend to use more than one extension Call recording To keep track of the specifics of calls and improve staff training ACD and Agent Control To
117. con on the toolbar 2 Expand the Handling Costs category a Fed Costs Handling Costs E User Costs H g PBXs Location Specific 8 Caniers 3 Click User Costs 4 Click Edit User Handling Costs Number Job Title Organisation Group Hourly Cost administrator Sales 15 00 John Sales manager Sales 20 00 pete smith Sales 12 50 Mark Snr sales TEENE Office admin 28 00 max Office admin 6 00 bill personal assistant Customer service 17 00 sarah admin oficer Customer serice 10 00 Chapter 12 7 Call Costing 5 This window will list all users along with their job titles and organisation groups as set through the organisation setup In the Hourly Cost column you can assign per user a pro rata hourly rate You can copy a value to multiple users by right clicking the mouse button and copying then selecting and pasting onto the other users Click OK Editing Handling Rules Handling Rules are used to specify when handling costs are applied You can choose to apply configured handling costs to incoming answered calls outgoing calls or both How To Editing Handling rules 1 Select the Costs option from the Configure menu or click the icon on the toolbar 2 Expand the Handling Costs category in the left pane of the window This will display all available PBXs in your enterprise Expand the PBX you want to configure the rules for Fed Costs Handlin
118. ct of your call usage There are two main types of report Lists and Summaries A list report will display individual call details showing the time date CLI and other information relating to the call A summary report will display the number of calls totalled up as well as other statistics The reports can be easily renamed copied and customised Selecting which reports to run Reports can be either run in an ad hoc manner where they are configured and run as they are required or as a saved report item Saved reports can be run on demand or grouped together and run as a report schedule at a specified time Creating and Using Report items from a template Report templates are the definitions that form the basis of all reports The report templates are organised into categories of e Availability Used in conjunction with ACD to track the availability of users e Performance Used to show general performance indicators such as grade of service and responsiveness e System Details alarms audit logs auto configured devices and unused or infrequently used devices e Usage Wide ranging reports showing phone system usage grouped and filtered by any combination of parameters Reports can contain itemised details or summarised data The actual report templates are as follows Availability Chapter 14 1 Reporting e Unavailable codes e User availability Performance e Grade of service e Response times System e Alarms Raised
119. d a Short name 2 digits 5 Click OK Creating Unavailable Code groups It is important to keep track of who is available to answer calls at any given time Equally it is important to be aware of the current status of any staff currently unavailable Unavailable codes Chapter 13 8 Agent Control enable us to do this When a member of a team becomes unavailable they must specify a reason via the unavailable code selection from their agent control toolbar One problem that may be encountered is that of providing different sets of unavailable codes for different groups of staff Supervisors for example may be able to attend meetings or review calls whereas telesales staff may not To accommodate this requirement we can create groups of unavailable codes Typical group settings may be Supervisors Codes Break Refreshments Meetings Call Query Sales Agents Codes Break Refreshments Call Parts Dept How To Creating Editing an Unavailable Codes group 1 Select Configure gt Telephone System gt Agent Control gt Unavailable Code Groups from the menu Configure Telephone System 2 PBXs EI IY Head Office eS i Call Recording Er a Agent Control Eis oo Agent Control fa P Unavailable Code Groups 2 Select Create an Unavailable Code group 3 Enter the name of the new Unavailable Code group in the dialog Create a New Unavailable Code Group aes Identify the Unavailable Code Grou
120. d display the windows borders again You should now be able to resize and move the window Incoming Calls All Trunks Head Office DEII Refresh Data Data is automatically taken from the database at prescribed intervals You can select the refresh data option to force the data of the window to be updated This will force a retrieval of the data Configure This option allows you to configure existing window settings The actual dialog presented will depend on the window type displayed See real time window configuration for more details Chapter 3 3 MyCalls User Environment Display Values Head Office Historical E Current Only Interval Period Group Daily All Trunks Refresh Time 5 10 Title Outgoing Calls Visibility W Show Title T Show Group T Show Interval i Show Value Show PBX Display Font The View Menu The MyCalls main screen provides a blank area onto which you can arrange various real time windows In addition to the Real Time windows you can also view popup windows to allow easy access to the various logs which are recorded within the MyCalls database These Log windows include Calls Unreturned calls Alarms and Audit logs To access the log windows you can either select from the View menu where you will see selection checkboxes to show or hide the various log windows Selecting either Call Records Unreturned Calls Alarms or Audit Log makes the associated win
121. delete Click Delete Caller Group You will be prompted to confirm deletion of the selected group Click OK How To View of Edit group membership 1 From the Callers Configuration screen click Caller Groups and select the group you want to configure 2 Click View or Edit the Group 3 Inthe Edit Group Membership window that appears you will see a list of callers in the group which will have been configured using the methods described in the manual sections 6 1 1 6 1 2 or 6 1 4 or by clicking on the Add new caller button and creating a new caller directly in the group 4 You can edit the Alternate Numbers and Names of the callers in this group Select a new Type using the Type Column And you can also change group membership for a member by selecting another available option in the Group field Number Alternate Number Name Type Caller Group Unassigned Reception 5 Press OK to close the window and save any changes you have made How To Assigning Callers to a group 1 If you have configured Caller Groups then you can group individual callers within a group to enhance real time statistics and make reporting easier On the Edit Callers window that is displayed you can either click Edit next to the caller you wish to edit the group for and alter the group in the window that appears or you can do it here by selecting a new group in the Group column You can cha
122. dicates that there may not be enough staff available Wait time alarms include e Incoming Wait Time Alarms e Overflow wait time Alarms e Abandoned Wait Time Alarms Call Time Alarms Determined by what the acceptable minimum and maximum average call times should be in a one hour period An average call time that is less than the minimum value can indicate that you may be rushing your calls An average call time that is more than the maximum value indicates that the calls are taking too long and you may need to speed up the conversation e Overflow Call time Alarms e Outgoing call time Alarms Service level alarms General Service Level Alarms Are triggered when the general service level drops below the defined minimum service level setting for the alarm A value below the minimum average can indicate that there are not enough staff members available to take all of the calls Conversely if the value is above the maximum value it might indicate that there are too many people available to answer Calls Abandoned Service Level Alarms Are determined by the minimum and maximum average Abandoned Grade of Service GOS in a one hour period Emergency Alarms These are triggered when a call is made to an emergency number You can specify what constitutes an emergency number Toll Fraud Alarms These alarms are used to detect misuse of the phone system These alarms can detect if a call is too expensive or lasts for too long or is to from a
123. din 00 00 00 al Include maximum time in DND Maximum time 00 00 OOS Seaea 00 00 OOK G Only this unavailable code Alarm Schedules An alarm schedule is a named configuration that allows you to specify when an alarm will be active Alarms schedules can be configured to be e Active for all dates or for a fixed date range e Active for all times of the day or for a fixed period of time e Active for all days of a week or for a selection of days pail ea en ares I is E Please select the times during the day you would like the alarm to be active Always al band 00 00 and 77 50 Between these times E nm fo TF Please select the days on which you would like the alarm to be active Every day A On these days Sun Mon v Tue D i Wed Thu Fr ory at Chapter 11 14 Alarms It is very useful to create alarm schedules for out of hours times as well as alarm schedules for working hours This allows you to configure multiple alarms of the same type but with different schedules so they act differently For example you may desire that calls cannot last more than 60 minutes during a week and no outgoing calls out of hours In this case there would be three alarm schedules created one that covers the working week 08 00 to 18 00 one that covers out of hours during the week and one that covers weekends The toll fraud alarm with a 60 minute call duration alarm would be assigned the working wee
124. dow visible on the screen View Reports System User Help fel Real Time Information E Lx Call Records window Unreturned Calls Window B Alarms Window Audit Log Window Main Toolbar Grid Bar Status Bar a Always On Top Agent Desktop only In addition to the logs you can also enable the viewing of the main toolbar below the main menu at the top of the screen i id oF hh 43 Y in amp eB Le Extension stats The Grid bar at the bottom of the screen a Ten gt Alarms 2 Calls U2 Unreturned Calls i Audit Log The Status window found at the bottom of the screen Chapter 3 4 MyCalls User Environment ea Alarme iie ie Licensed to User Kelmar T echnical Custom fm 13 07 2008 00 00 Drag a column header here to group by that column Date Time PBX From Device Location _ 2210972008 10 11 _ Head Office 012 Line 012 _ Merthyr Tydfil Inc Tir Incoming 00 01 15 00 04 13 The main log windows are viewable as grids The standard grids are Calls Unreturned calls Alarms Audit Logs These grids share the following features View the grid Positioning the mouse over the appropriate icon in the bottom grid bar will cause the window to pop up Pin the Grid Allows the grid to be fixed in position by selecting the Pin icon to the top right of the window If the grid is not pinned then it will automatically hide minimise when the mouse is not positioned
125. e Monitoring Organisation Users Appendix A 1 MyCalls Licensing Scheduling Grade of Service Yes Yes Yes Yes Callers ae Yes a ii Yes Yes Call Playback Optional Optional ACD Supervisors Agent Desktop a a C Users Digital Playback Optional Optional Optional Trunks Analog Playback Optional Optional Optional Trunks Appendix A 2 END OF DOCUMENT
126. e Real Time Statistics section by clicking the to the left of the text and then expand the Extension Groups section Highlight the Group Statistics option by clicking it and in the right side of the window click Create a New Group Statistics View PEM Display Values Head Office M Historical Current Only Group Interval Period E Admin A Daily ie All Analog Phones E All Announcement Ports Refresh Time m E All Auto Attendants 60 r F J AlI Cordless Phones Edit Title Font All Digital Phones All Extension Types im All Desk Phones a All Non PEX Phones b Edit Statistics Font 3 If your MyCalls configuration is using more than one PBX then you can select between configured PBXs using the PBX drop down list 4 Group Select an Extension Group or multiple groups from the list of available groups in the group list window By default selections for All Desk Phones All Digital Phones All Extension Types All Non PBX Phones All System Phones All User PBX Phones All User Phones All Voice Mail Ports and Unassigned Extensions will be available Additional entries are configured through telephone configuration 5 Display Values You can select to display either historic of current values If you choose historical then the intervals available will be either Daily or Hourly Daily will display statistics for the current day whilst hourly will display the statistics fo
127. e and capacity Busiest days and periods of the day In addition we have figures for number of calls received and abandoned Chapter 1 8 Welcome to MyCalls The Call comparison over the same interval report allows us to compare different types of calls Let s take a look at how the abandoned calls compare with the incoming calls overall Abandoned calls Sunday Saturday Friday Thursday E Abandoned calls Wednesday Tuesday Monday 800 Even from this basic data we can get a more detailed picture of events An obvious observation would be that Saturday shows a high rate of abandonment whereas the call volume is one of the lowest If we compare the two sets of data showing the values as a percentage of the total respective calls calls each day as a percentage of total calls for the week the comparison becomes clearer still We can see for instance that Saturday has a high proportion of abandoned calls compared with the call volume for that day E Calls E Abd The reasons for this may be due to lots of factors but you can see that with this relatively basic information from a few simple reports we can begin to make predictions about our call volumes caller behaviour trunk requirements and agent activity Chapter 1 9 Welcome to MyCalls Measure performance What to measure Looking deeper into the data by use of reports and real time statistical data we can begin to look at the information from differ
128. e backed up Configuration and Calls It is suggested that a regular backup of both databases is scheduled to eliminate problems if your system fails Chapter 15 1 System Utilities How To Automatic Backup 1 Click System 2 Select Automatic Backup Backup Time fis 00 OD Backup Configuration Preserve backups for day s Backup Calls Preserve backups for 7 day s Cancel In the window that appears you can alter the time of daily automatic backup along with how many days of historical copies to preserve Optionally you can also back up the calls database by clicking the option Backup Calls Click OK Manual Backup Alternatively you can manually backup the databases How To Back up the Database 1 Click System 2 Select Backup database Database Configuration Overwrite file if it already exists Filename Backup Name KS sAccounting Backup Backup Description Chapter 15 2 System Utilities In the window that appears select the database that you want to back up and enter the file name to use for the backup Optionally you can provide a name and description for the backup The filename MUST be a file local to this PC backup CANNOT be made to network shares or UNC paths Click OK Database Information To access the database information select System and click Database Information The window that appears provide
129. e delay experienced whilst waiting for the call to be picked up by an agent There are a number of scenarios but essentially the call has been connected and you have been routed through to a queue The delay in queue may be interrupted with announcement messages to help relieve the boredom factor Call talk time or call duration is the time the agent spends on the phone handling the call After call work is the time spent writing up the call afterwards This is also referred to as wrap up time There are several parameters we can measure but the following are probably the most important Time to answer TTA Also referred to as Ring Time this is the time taken for an agent to pick up a call once it has been connected to the PBX This includes any time the call is in queue plus any ringing time on the extension Average time to answer ATA This is the average TTA for an individual device or a group of devices Call Duration The actual talk time of a call The average duration can also be calculated Time to Abandon The time taken to abandon a call The average time to abandon can also be calculated Service level An absolute measurement such as Time to Answer TTA or Average Time to Answer ATA can give misleading results This because the average time can be quite short but deeper analysis can reveal that some calls are taking far longer to be answered than the average value would suggest It is not unusual to see ATA values of les
130. e lines Unassigned trunks Any trunks with type set to unassigned Viewing groups To view the members of a group click on the Group required and select View or Edit the group The group members are listed in a grid You can sort the members in different ways by selecting the column header For example to list the extensions in an extension group in order of extension number click on the Number column alternatively to list by Name in alphabetical order click on the Name column and so forth Identifying stray devices using Unassigned groups It is good practice to assign you various devices to custom groups that you have created Any devices that are not specifically assigned to a group will remain in the unassigned group By viewing the unassigned group for a particular device or by running a report to list the unassigned devices you can quickly track down any devices that have not been accounted for These devices may be either unused incorrectly configured or have been automatically configured and not yet assigned You can also identify infrequently used devices by running the system report designed for that purpose See reporting User Defined Groups Creating a user defined group To configure Groups Double click the Configure gt Telephone Systems gt PBX in most cases there will be only one Click on the Groups icon and select the group type Chapter 8 23 Telephone System Configuratio
131. e mouse button To move the position of a column drag the column horizontally along the grid Grid View Options Clicking on the options button allows you to display the following options Record View Options Le x Specify update options Enter the type and number of records to show and how often they should be refreshed Be careful notto enter a very large number of records ora very short refresh time as this will slow down the system and increase the amount of data on the network significantly Show these sorts of call gt My calls All calls for Users in my Organisational Group on my PEX All calls for Users in my Organisational Group across all PBAs Custom Edit Quick Search Maximum number of records to show 50 me oe Edit Title Font Refresh time in 5 60 Edit Records Font OK Cane My calls only This displays only calls related to the user currently logged onto the system All calls for users in my Organisational Group on my PBX Lists all calls for users in the logged on user s group but only includes those extensions connected to the local PBX All calls for users in my Organisational Group across all PBX s Lists all calls for users in the logged on user s group irrespective of the PBX the extension is connected to Custom Allows setting of specific period for calls This can be a date range and can be further limited to a specific time period during each day Extension
132. e selected group Under the item All Users the users are grouped by their role within the MyCalls system Chapter 9 1 Organisation and Users Why Configure Users Whilst it is permissible to only configure MyCalls to use devices e g extensions in order to track and report calls it is always advisable to create a user configuration for several reasons Users can be organised hierarchically thus reports can group information in terms of groups and subgroups For example if you have several sales groups then a hierarchical view will allow you to create several subgroups under an overall group called Sales Reports can then be performed on the overall performance of sales as well as each sales group within the sales department Users can be responsible for more than one extension thus reports can be generated to record the user rather than the extension activity ACD requires the creation of users for logging on and off queues Understanding User Roles Assigning the appropriate roles to users will allow control of the system to be carefully governed and thus reduce the risk of untrained users making damaging configuration changes or running reports that they should not see Enterprise Desktop View Agent Desktop Layout Create Real Time windows Save Load screen layouts View Live Call Records Alarm Audit Entries Configure Run Reports Configure Collectors Configure Telephone System Organisation Ca
133. e window that appears select the callers you want to delete in the callers list You can select multiple callers by holding down the control key ctrl as you click on the rows Billy Bruce Press OK to complete the deletion process Be aware that you will not be prompted to confirm this process once you press the OK button so please make sure you have the right callers highlighted before pressing OK to continue Importing Callers You can import a csv comma separated values file directly into MyCalls to speed up caller setup This file should include the following columns Number Alternate Number and Name in that order to be imported successfully For more detailed information see the section on importing data Caller Groups Caller groups are groups that contain callers that are related in some way within a business By using Caller Groups it is possible to report over a range of callers such as all business callers or all personal callers Chapter 10 3 Callers a Callers be HB All Business Callers Ha All Callers me ia All Personal Callers 48 Unassigned Callers A System and User defined groups User defined groups are custom groups that have been created by users whilst system groups are those that are pre installed with the application and cannot be removed There are four system groups that can be used which are e All business callers Holds callers that are of type Business e
134. each state is shown separately The number of devices in any given state is shown e g Ringing 2 indicates 2 devices in the Ringing state The devices or users in a given state are shown with the longest in that state at the top of the list idle 1 Off Hook 0 Ringing 2 Mark E if in 300 00 03 11 Pte eee eee manennsnnan See tneeesasaeeaceseccasesenaeeseeneesnenensuensecaenaenaadveenseeeenae Scene eseeGeneaeaeetseeaeesanaeenaeeeeaaeeaecmseseeenseenentaGuaeeaanaedhanae eae SeenareaeneHseuGeneneGaeeaeeaeeGGeaeNOneNenCateaennseGeensesetaaneaenausacsinenaanaeetarsennarnaeunrnseuaananenaneaenas Incoming t Hold 0 Outgoing 0 Internal 0 Unavailable 0 Wrapup 0 BGG em SS ee hGendena hina Dina inni nainn aeons Genk inni Aninha niini nahan iden Sinn co EOE iniii iiini iniiis bese ETTET ETITI AT TTA A TTIE ITET EITTEA TITTAT di ae Shwe Sine Mae TIET Roe TITT ITTE TI ITTI TITT ATITA T AA EIAI TETTETETT Summary view This view displays basic information relating to users or extensions Only the currently active state is shown at any one time for each user or extension a Number Status Time Number Mame Several types of information can be displayed in this view e Group name e User extension name e Extension number e Current status e Time in current state e Calling Called number Overview view This view is useful for showing the state of many extensions in one screen This view displ
135. ed user then Press the Clear button When finished press OK to complete your selection 8 Click OK Chapter 8 20 Telephone System Configuration How To Creating a range of User Logins 1 From the MyCalls Telephone System Configuration screen click User Logins Pin Codes 2 Click Create a Range of User Logins in the User Login configuration area 3 Inthe dialog window that appears a number of fields are available for entry Some are mandatory fields for successful setup whilst others are optional inputs FEX Code Number of Logins Head Office 1 Start Login Number Number of Logins Enter here the number of User Logins you wish to create in the range You can use the arrow buttons to the right of the field to either increment or decrement the value using your mouse or enter the value using the keyboard Start Login Number Enter the number to start your User Login ID number range from here Click OK A block of user logins will have now been inserted into the Configured User Logins list box You should configure these user logins with appropriate name and options using procedures described later in this topic before clicking the OK button to complete your user login creation process Note that the user logins you create should correspond to those configured in the telephone system How To Editing existing User Logins 1 From the MyCalls Telephone System Configuration screen
136. ed when an alarm condition has been broken The application is passed as a single parameter the string of the alarm message For the example above the command line for the application would be pageralert exe The free hard disk space on your system drive has fallen below 10GB 7GB This is very useful if you wish to implement some extra functionality that is not available within MyCalls yourself Examples of this may be that you run an application that calls a pager or sends an SMS message to a cell phone Alarm Severity Levels Not all alarms need to be problem alarms that you must act on immediately It is useful to be given a warning that if this persists then the problem will escalate MyCalls supports four levels of alarm severity e Information e Warning e Severe e Critical The meaning of each of these is up to the company An example of how these may be used is when looking at the Grade of Service It might be useful to generate an Information alarm if the average Grade of Service drops below 95 a warning alarm if it drops below 90 a severe alarm if it drops below 85 and a critical if it drops below 80 Each alarm can be configured to do something different For example the information alarm may send a message to each of the users A warning alarm may send an email to a supervisor A severe alarm may run a report and email it to a supervisor A critical alarm may run an external program that has a paging interface and pag
137. ee 41 Custom Detailed Reports TONKS aen aA AT A aac cae oases E N 41 Custom Detailed Reports Extensi n easan a a a a a a 42 Custom Detailed Reports DIDs Pilot numbers Account codes Callers cccccescsceeeseeeeeeeeens 42 Custom Detailed Reports COStS cccccccccsecccscecceseceecccsecceneceeeceeeeceeueetenseeeuceseseeeuseeeuseeeeseegeensuss 42 Custom Detaned REDO S TIMES munniea n a a aA N 42 REDOT VOW ON ororen E E E A A 42 12 MyCalls Advanced Call Management System OW TO Cheated CIStTHOUTIOR Cucra aa a ious eaten 43 How To Creating a Report distriDUtion list c cc rasion ar a NE 43 SCNECUIMEIRE DONS sninen etal eal canna N ooauaaoe 44 HOW to Creating scheduled RED OMS sedaan E E nee eabaweetied an xe staadeaiue 44 Chapter 15 SYSTEM UTILITIES ices sascicescccetoss sdcacawaavedsosswsaauansvceesbadesansavecuosnssaasasenseesies souasanaavee 1 SVEM CONE UTON siera T E R T N N teastestinnaaesees 1 Automate Bal UD nren a N ees 1 ROW TO AUTOMIATIC BACK isie A E O a 2 Man al Bac K P cossera a Alien uw Sitios barat he alee talk all 2 HOW TO Back UD Ihe DataDadS Critics jeaita a E EE AEA ET dicen tanmaudeucte EN AEE 2 Database INTORMATON as A A 3 Removing unwanted INFOFMATION cccceeeccccceeseccceeecccceescccceaesececseneceeeeusecessueneceseuneceeseuecessuenesss 3 How To Remove unwanted information ssssssesessssssssserrersssssrtrrresssssssssrereesssssserereeresssseerereeesss 4
138. eesececeeecceeeeesececeeeceseuneceeeseeeceeteneeetas 3 HOw to Set up recording rules Tor ExXtenslONns sennie iien aoe ee 5 Wsing the Call PlayOack INtenaGe aecnar nnna a einane a a AA 5 HOW TOs Selectand Playback Cahuri a EEE sites Ua ctheicean A EATA 5 MVOC Adie WAVIOL secs catnacstereiacias tat notated ats lariat teats salva eaten ia ast van tcise oanc Bets oe eeaeae Era 6 PINGING Recorded Call Sorreran nna a N ta eect atic an ace 7 QUICK SEI Cenie n n E E N A NN NA n NN 7 Exportine CallREcC rdine TOS nerea a a N 8 Recordings which youscannot listen TO sisi cedsinddecseveiceteasinacdiaseeisees anand E E AEE aei 8 Call Recordine ConiguratiONnigs inn a a E a 9 TUNK GORTIC Ua tl ON aena E E I E eee 9 Access to the Call Recording configuration sscsesesereressreresaneresrererureressuererureresunrersraressunrersrerenuns 9 How to Access the Call Recording configuration Screen esssssssessssresessreresererssrrresrrersssrereserersseere 9 How To Add Call Recorders to the MyCalls Configuration cccccccssssececeesececcesceesaesseceeeuaeces 10 AEn AES EAE IN EEI T AEE A R A E A E E T E TAT ETT 11 Backup Call ROCOL GIN GS sanee a a a N nea 12 How To Configure Call REcording Backup ssrtrennes a ne 12 How To Manually Start a Call Recording Backup cccccssecccssseccessceceesceceneceeeeneeesenceseeeceseeeseees 12 How To Cancel a Running Call Recording Backup ccccecccceseccceeceeseeeeecececeeenseeeeceeeeceeeeee
139. efers to how well agents adhere to their schedules The two terms most often associated with adherence include availability the amount of time agents were available and compliance when they were available to take calls After Call Work ACW Also called wrap up post call processing average work time or not ready Work that is necessitated by and immediately follows an inbound call Announcement Port Generally used by an ACD system which periodically transfers a call to an announcement port and plays a reassurance message to the caller if there are no agents free Auto Attendant The auto attendant feature is used to route incoming telephone calls based on selections or information provided by the incoming caller The auto attendant feature may use interactive voice response IVR to prompt the caller to select the call routing based on category choices or it may use the calling number identification to determine the destination e g a telephone number for a specific sales group Agent The person who handles incoming or outgoing contacts Agent Status The mode an agent is in e g talk time after call work unavailable etc All Trunks Busy ATB When all trunks are busy in a specified trunk group Generally Trunk Usage reports indicate the percentage of trunks busy over a period of time as a percentage of potential usage for the whole group over that period Analogue Telephone transmission or switching that uses a fluctuating v
140. either a text editor or any application which creates CSV files such as Microsoft Excel Simply enter the list of values and export the list as a CSV file Chapter 16 8 Importing Data Into MyCalls 201 Alan 202 Debbie 203 Frank 204 Norma 205 Clive 206 Joe 207 Derek 208 Tony 209 Simon LO o i in a aa i He The following example shows the process for importing extensions Extensions are the most complex device to import other devices follow the same series of steps but with fewer items to specify How to Import a set of Extensions Generate the CSV file See formats below Navigate to the respective configuration screen Configuration gt Telephone system gt PBX gt Extensions Click the Import Extensions option Import Extensions Import Extensions Extensions can be imported from a Comma Separated Value csv file The format is Number Name All fields must be present but can be blank The Extensions loaded can then be edited or deleted if necessary before they are imported into the configuration Filename Import as Type C sers mike Desktop extensions csv Browse Digital Desk Phone Import to extension group SALES Import users to organisational group Create Users for named extensions Salvin Extensions to import Number Name 201 Alan A Debbie 203 Frank paini Norma 205 206 Joe 207 Derek Chapter 16 2 Importing Data Into MyCalls 4 From the Import screen use t
141. elect one or more organization groups from the organizational group s selection box to include multiple group s user statistics in the window Organisation groups are configured through the organization setup screen Select the window type i e detailed summary or overview described previously With the detailed and summary variants of this window you can add additional column fields using the Column Chooser button Removing a column is simple by holding the left mouse button on the column header and dragging the column out of the window then releasing the mouse button The overview variant can have the Short Names option applied which will then display abbreviated name of the user see user configuration You can change the style of the font for the detailed and summary windows separately using the Edit Summary Font and Edit Detailed Font screens Click OK Queue status and Queue group status When dealing with Users and Extensions we can only view their current status i e what is happening right now When we are dealing with DIDs Pilot numbers and Trunks however we want to see the amount of calls waiting to be answered When calls are waiting to be answered we refer to them as queued calls This can apply to the following situations e Where multiple lines are calling in on a single number DID for example e Where multiple calls are incoming on multiple lines and waiting to be answered e When calls are being queued within the
142. elected The DID and Pilot Number status may not be available on your telephone system Check with your maintainer for details FEX DID Head Office Toy Sales Show Detailed 5 Overvie Show Summary Use Short Names Edit Tithe Font Edit Status Font Visibility Show Title W Show Calls In Queue Label Show Caller W Show Calls In Queue Value W Show Trunk Show Longest Wait Label Show Usage W Show Longest Wait Value Cancel 5 If your MyCalls configuration is using more than one PBX then you can select between configured PBXs using the PBX drop down list 6 Select a DID available from the DID drop down list 7 You can change the style of the title font for the window by pressing the Edit Title Font button Chapter 5 7 Real Time Status and configuring the various style options 8 Inthe visibility area of the configuration screen there are a number of options that can change the view of your queue status window 9 To enable any of them just click the box to the left of the option and ensure there is a tick in the box 10 To disable an option just remove the tick 11 Show Title If enabled this will display in the window the device type and the device name 12 Show Caller If enabled this option will display in the window the CLI of the next caller in the queue 13 Show Trunk If enabled this will display in the window the trunk or line the next incoming queued call is being received from
143. er T2 GALI COSTING siisccsscsciaciccaacencseccaeeeh tae ecsC a chas Saxe eaten taeticcstennatiaees 1 COS US erect aaah es Bee ahead aa ete S OE TEA EE eigen etna ees alee meneame 1 EGICING FIXed ITTUNK TYDE COSTS sci csecpcceitec 28eict 5 lace a a a a 1 How To Editing fixed Trunk type COStS arearen A AN 2 Edine Fed Extension TY DO COSTS aera EE E ES r 3 How To Editing fixed Extension type COSES ansien a S E iawn 3 Editing fixed Additional COS tSisecrgunnn e E A Mawes E A 4 HOW TO Editing fixed additional COStSaisiisiesnsitoisicnnc n n a a a A 4 Fdinne FING TUNK COSS anna T ea euconcauesesicaad ee cnseeeane aces 5 HOW TOs Editing med Trunk COSTS cisean n TE NE E NS 5 Editing Fixed Extension COSUS eraron TEE E E ETAN ET E EATR 6 How To Editing fixed EXtensiOn COStUS srren iire E T EEO ia 6 Honaino COSTS aor E 7 BO Up kayo User CoS rete em PP er ee 7 HOW TOC BOILING US CTCOSUS nanana a a uaa eaaeaeees 7 Editing Hanaline RUES sesos tea5iciterecetcanlesenccesas EO a ebibute vised ene E nee 8 HOW TO Editing Handling TUlCS 2s sao ikh cui a ated alee 8 EGICING EXtenSlon Flan ie COStS rarnana a A lessen a aS 9 How To Editing Extension Handling COStS cccccsssccccssecccesececeseeceesceeeeeeceeeueceseeesseceeseuecensneeenees 9 EqItING ACCOUNT Code Hanlin COStS wiiioie artic iedetistedeationgteelahivdae diana eine a 10 How To Editing Account Code Handling COStS cccccesecccsssecceeseecesceceeeceseeueeeeeseeeeesceseeeceeeeneeees 10 Edit
144. er of time bands for a carrier The system will automatically check if there are any overlapping time bands and flag an error if any overlap Chapter 12 19 Call Costing How To Editing Costing Periods 1 Select the Costs option from the Configure menu or click the icon on the toolbar 2 Expand the Carriers option and select the Costing Periods option under the carrier you want to configure the settings for 3 Click Edit Costing Periods Name Interval Start Interval End Mon Tue Wed Thu Fn Sat Sun Daytime 08 00 00 17 59 59 Al amp Evening 18 00 00 73 59 59 akai Weekend 00 00 00 23 59 59 Bf 8 8 S 4 In this window by default you will have periods pre defined for Daytime Evening Morning and Weekend You can modify the values for each period including the period start time period end time and the days the costing period will apply on To change the days click the box in the column of the day you want to configure and if a tick is filled then the day is enabled otherwise the day is excluded from the period 5 You can add further costing periods by clicking the Add button which will prompt you to provide a unique name for the new period Name Daytime 6 Enter the new costing period name and click OK The new costing period will now appear in the Editing Costing Period window for you to configure the period values as explained earlier Name Interval Start Interval End
145. erate information to enable you to answer these and many other questions Starting with the measurement of call volumes MyCalls can provide you with all the relevant data Once you have that information you can begin to formulate a call handling strategy defining target answer times and call handling times This information in turn will allow you to formulate service level values for each part of your organisation Grouping calls and devices At this point you will need to break down your call handling into relevant groupings Your organisation will probably already contain predefined groups of people handling the calls either by location e g first floor second floor or more likely by service function such as sales purchasing accounts etc MyCalls allows you to create groups based around the type of device such as an extension You can group together several devices and view the data in real time on screen or generate a report showing how that group performs over a period of time This is grouping at its simplest level and MyCalls supports several devices all of which can be looked at individually or as grouped devices Each type of device allows us to look at the same call data but from a different viewpoint Adding flexibility with Users You can also look at the call data from a user s perspective where each user performs a role within the organisation Users can be organised into groups which reflect the organisation s
146. es the alarm details to the President of the company Chapter 11 17 Alarms Available Severity Levels Information The alarm will be displayed in this color Sea Green Y Real Time Notifications You can notify specified users of given call events Incoming ring Incoming call Outgoing call in real time You can either Send a message to the configured users by typing in the message contents You can use special placeholder codes 1 Insert the DID present on the call 2 Insert the ACD queue the call was directed to 3 Insert the caller 4 Insert the extension 5 Insert the time the call rang before connection Show a web page A locally available web page can be invoked in a browser Go to this web address Invoke a web URL for display in a browser Chapter 11 18 Alarms You may use the following in messages and web pages to insert selected call information a be Insert the DID present on the call AA Insert the ACD Queue that the call was directed to HI Insert the caller the call came from or was made to 24 Insert the extension handling the call XDA Insert the time the call rang before it was connected Send this message Call on extension 4 has been ringing for 45 Show this web page Go to this web address ee Nobicanon hile oo Incoming Cal OOO Outgoing Call Users Selected Chapter 11 19 Call Costing Chapter 1 2 Call Costi
147. esk Phone Sales Edit 236 236 Unassigned None Edit 237 237 Unassigned None Edit 300 Mark Digital Desk Phone Sales Edit 301 Max Digital Desk Fhone Reception Edit 12 In the dialog box that appears you can change the extension name choose the type of device change group membership edit the device and choose whether to enable statistics Chapter 8 25 Telephone System Configuration 13 Clicking on the Edit button allows you to modify the default user and set a voicemail timeout if the device is assigned a type of auto attendant voicemail or announcement port FEX Code Number Head Office 0327 Mame Default User 032 Mone Type Extension Group Cordless Phone None Voce Mail Timeout Seconds 14 If you have clicked Edit to edit the device settings then Click OK to close the dialog 15 Finally once you have finished editing the devices within the group click OK You may also wish to delete a group How To Delete a group 1 From the MyCalls Telephone System Configuration screen click Extension Groups and select the group you want to delete 2 Click Delete Extension Group in the Extension Group configuration area View or Edit the Group Use the View or Edit the Group wizard the view or changes the members for this group Edit Extension Group Configuration Use the Edit Extension Group Configuration wizard to change the user defined notes
148. eue Status e Longest Wait Queue Status Alarm These alarms can be set to trigger if the number of calls waiting to be answered is too high or if the wait time of the longest waiting call is too high Trunk Groups W Calis In Queue E Longest Wait Maximum number Maximum time Trunk Group 0 z w OO OOK All Analog Trunks DIDs E Calls In Queue E Longest Wait Maximum number Maximum time DID Pilot Numbers Calls In Queue Longest Wart Maximum number Maximum time Pilot Number Lin User Status Alarm A user status alarm can be set to trigger if any of the users in a set of groups has entered any of the rest states unavailable wrap up do not disturb too many times since the last time they logged on These alarms can also be set to trigger if the user stays in any of these states for too long a period Note that the unavailable alarm can either apply to all unavailable states or just the state indicated by the unavailable code Note that this feature is not available on all PBXs Chapter 11 13 Organisational Groups Organisation Organisation Office admin Organisation Sales R Include number of times in wrapup Maximum number of times r Include number of times in DND Maximum number of times Include number of times in unavailable Maximum number of times P 1 Any unavailable code Include maximum time off hook ERRE 00 00 00 H Alarms 7 Include maximum time in wrapup cee
149. evenue producing call centres It is total revenue divided by total number of calls for a given period of time Average Handling Time AHT The sum of average talk time plus average after call work Average Holding Time on Trunks AHT The average time inbound transactions occupy the trunks Average Time to Answer ATA or ASA A measure that reflects the average delay of all calls including those that receive an immediate answer Also called average delay Average Abandonment Time AAT Also called average delay to abandon The average time that callers wait in queue before abandoning The calculation considers only the calls that abandon Barge In An ACD feature that allows a supervisor or manager to join or barge in on a call being handled by an agent Blended Agent An agent who handles both inbound and outbound calls or who handles contacts from different channels e g email and phone Call Also called contact interaction or transaction Although it most often refers to a telephone call call can also refer to a video call a Web call and other types of customer contacts Chapter 17 4 Acronyms amp Glossary Call Forcing An ACD feature that automatically delivers calls to agents who are available and ready to take calls This is sometimes called automatic answer Call Load Also called workload Call load is volume multiplied by average handling time for a given period of time Call Recording A type of monitori
150. f left blank the system will populate this field with the Number 7 Extension Group You can select an extension group to group this device under The values in this list are configurable under Extension Groups The default value is set as None 8 Enable real time statistics This option should be enabled if you want call data collected from the telephone system for this extension to be included in the real time statistics It is good practice for extensions not used to have this option disabled so as to minimize unnecessary processing 9 Default User Specify a default user using the select button See default user section You can assign a default user to an extension to enhance reporting A default user is someone who regularly uses the extension 10 Type Select the extension device type from the drop down menu 11 Voicemail Timeout If the Type field is set to either auto attendant voice mail or announcement port then setting a voice mail timeout will cause any incoming calls to the extension connected for less than the voicemail timeout to be marked as abandoned 12 Click OK Chapter 8 12 Telephone System Configuration How To Creating a range of Extensions From the MyCalls Telephone System Configuration screen Click Extensions Click Create a range of extensions In the dialogue window that appears a number of fields are available for entry Some are mandatory fields for successful setup whilst
151. f the account code is not in one of the groups in the list First configure which call type we wish the alarm to trap in this case incoming and outgoing calls are included Chapter 11 10 Alarms i Toll Fraud Alarm Configuration Wizard P Toll Fraud Alarm Wizard This page allows you to specify the acceptable call durations and costs that apply to the included extensions pilot numbers and users Alarm notifications will be sent if any of the alarm conditions are met and any of the number caller account code conditions are met V Include Outgoing Calls At least one of Incoming Qutgoing Internal must be checked E Include Internal Calls Then specify timing or costing conditions for the alarm You can specify the maximum ring time beyond which an alarm will be generated the maximum call duration and the maximum call cost To set any or all of these limits simply select the appropriate checkbox and using the numeric setting specify the time in seconds Alarm on calls lasting more than 15 al minutes or Alarm on calls ringing for more than q seconds or E Alarm on calls costing more than f Ring time alarms only apply to incoming calls Next we can specify how the Number list Caller list and Account code list affect the alarm generation For an alarm to occur the conditions must be met for all three lists For list parameter we can specify Never alarm on items in the list effectively ignore this list
152. f the volumes and handling times of different call types for all members of a group for any given type of device e Summary All Calls by ACD Group e Summary All Calls by Agent e Summary All Calls by DID e Summary All Calls by Extension e Summary All Calls by trunk e Summary All Calls by Costing Type Provides a summary of the volumes and handling times of different call types for any given type of device e Summary All Incoming Calls e Summary All Outgoing Calls e Summary Overflowed Calls by ACD Group e Summary Grade of Service Provides a summary of the percentage of 30 minute intervals for which the Grade of Service exceeded a specified value e Usage Trunk usage by Half Hour Lists the number of trunks that were concurrently busy for each interval The total duration of all the calls for that time interval and a percentage of the trunks busy against the number of trunks available is also shown This report allows you to identify times where your lines are being used most and whether you have too many or too few lines available Chapter 14 9 Reporting Using Report items J i Report tems See Custom Reports ee Daily Reports H E Monthly Reports Weekly Reports z A Repot Schedules How To Creating a Report item Select Report Template on the left side of the configure reports window Select Create Saved Report Item in the right pane You will be asked to provide your report with a name
153. figure these DIDs with appropriate names and groups using procedures described later in this topic before clicking the OK button to complete your DID creation process Note that the DID numbers you create should correspond to those configured in the telephone system How To Editing existing DIDs 1 From the MyCalls Telephone System Configuration screen click DIDs 2 Click Create or Edit a DID in the DID configuration area The Edit DID screen will appear 3 Inthe dialog box that appears click the Edit button to the right of the DID you want to edit 4 Inthe second dialogue box that appears configure a Name for the DID and if required select a DID Group and enable or disable the real time statistics option for this DID PEX Code Number Name Head Office 400 400 DID Group None e E Enable Real Time Statistics Callback Number 5 Click OK 6 Repeat these stages for as many DIDs as you need to configure 7 Click OK to save changes Chapter 8 15 Telephone System Configuration Account Codes Account codes are numbers entered by the person answering the call and are usually assigned to a customer a project department marketing campaign or any other business function Reports can then be run against these account codes to identify the calls assigned to that particular code Create Edit Account Codes How To Creating a single Account Code 1 From the MyCalls Telephone
154. for you then they can easily be modified manually Area codes must be specified without the trunk access code Chapter 12 11 Call Costing The list of local area codes can also be imported from a file which can be easier if you have the information available from another source The format of the file is very straight forward one area code on one line followed by carriage return 1270 1260 1606 United Kingdom Local Area Codes The United Kingdom defines its local area codes by the area codes that are adjacent to the one that is specified for the area code of the exchange the PBX is connected to How To Editing Local Area codes 1 Select the Costs option from the Configure menu or click the icon on the toolbar 2 Expand the Location Specific category in the left pane of the window This will display all available PBXs in your enterprise Expand the PBX you want to configure the costs for Fed Costs Handling Costs Location Specific El PBXs lf Head Office 3 Click the Local Area Codes option 4 Click Edit Local Area Codes Area Code 1565 1606 1829 1925 5 The displayed area codes are those that can be dialled from the location of the PBX incurring just a local charge You can add a new local number by clicking Add or import a local number by clicking Import 6 Click OK Chapter 12 12 Call Costing Edit Carrier Associations Carrier as
155. g Costs User Costs El 8 PBXs El Head Office fer 4 Handling Rules Location Specific a Camers 3 Click the Handling Rules option 4 Click Edit User Handling Rules Apply handling costs to answered calls Apply handling costs to outgoing calls This window will give you the option to select and apply handling costs to incoming answered calls outgoing calls or both By default both options are enabled but to de select an option remove the tick in the option box to the left of the text Click OK Chapter 12 8 Call Costing Editing Extension Handling Costs Extension handling costs are used to specify pro rata hourly rates that will be applied and charged to an extension whilst handling a call How To Editing Extension Handling costs 1 Select the Costs option from the Configure menu or click the icon on the toolbar 2 Expand the Handling Costs category in the left pane of the window This will display all available PBXs in your enterprise Expand the PBX you want to configure the costs for 3 Click the Extension Costs option 4 Click Edit Extension Handling Costs Number Name Type Grou Hourly Cost 208 208 Unassigned None 550 235 Reception Digital Desk Phone Sales 7 50 236 236 Unassigned None 8 40 a7 237 Unassigned None 8 40 300 Mark Digital Desk Phone Sales 12 00 301 Max Digital Desk Phone Reception 6 75 5 This window will l
156. g Transferred E Incoming Transferred Chapter 14 31 Reporting Group Summary time profile This report gives a group summary presented at specified time intervals The time interval settings are specified as the interval count and the interval value as per the previous call type summary comparison report The difference with this report is that you specify a group of devices to report against as shown below Device Type Groups Select All Select None Include sub groups of selected groups Interval Interval Type 1 Hour Group Summary Time Profile Created On 24 10 2008 10 37 31 Covering Period 24 10 2008 00 00 00 to 24 10 2008 23 59 59 Report Filtered To Show summaries for the device type Organisation Group Transferred calls are being reported as a multiple calls Number of Calls Average Duration Average Ring Time Num Long Short Abd Interval Start Ans Abd Out Tir Ans Out Ans Abd Waits Calls Abd Calls GOS GOS Head Office Sales Support Head Office Sales Support 24 10 2008 00 00 00 0 0 0 O 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 0 0 0 O 100 00 100 00 24 10 2008 01 00 00 0 0 0 O 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 0 0 0 O 100 00 100 00 24 10 2008 02 00 00 0 0 0 O 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 0 0 0 O 100 00 100 00 24 10 2008 03 00 00 0 0 0 O 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 0 0 0 O 100 00 100 00 24 10 2008 04 00 00 0 0 0 O 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 0 0 0 O 100 00 100 00
157. g devices and groups are Look for devices in their System groups as well as their logical groups If you know a device is a specific type then look in the system group for that type Make your groups as small as possible so making individual devices easier to locate Name your groups so they make sense to you and your users Only enable statistics for devices if you really need to as it impacts on system performance Regularly check for unassigned devices and remove them from the configuration if possible Use device import as the preferred method of configuring your devices and users Accessing configuration options using the menu Using the MyCalls menu you can access the configuration screens using Configure gt Telephone Systems gt PBXs To configure Devices Call Recording Groups call control or Agent Control Double click the PBX in most cases there will be only one i PBXs a Head Office oo iy Call Recording E i Agent Control Gf Call Control Elf Devices edie Account Codes nl M OIDs nope Extensians G Pilot Numbers JT Trunks Configuration Essentials Accessing configuration options using toolbar shortcuts On the MyCalls toolbar Click on the G Icon Chapter 8 2 Telephone System Configuration What to Configure Essential features In order to configure MyCalls you must be logged on as a PBX Administrator for more details on user privileges see the section on Organisa
158. g talk time such as placing customers on hold to confer with supervisors should be included in this measurement Chapter 17 8 Acronyms amp Glossary TCP IP Trunk A trunk that routes calls through the internet rather than the PSTN Telemarketing Generally refers to outbound calls for the purpose of selling products or services or placing informational calls to customers prospective customers or constituents Time Parameter Distribution Report Report that list the number of calls that have either a wait call or hold time within a specified time period The time periods can start at any value end at any value and each interval can be any size Toll Fraud alarms Determines whether a call is too expensive or lasts for too long or is to from a specific destination Trunk Also called a line exchange line or circuit A telephone circuit linking two switching systems Trunk Group A collection of trunks associated with a single peripheral and usually used for a common purpose Trunk Load The load that trunks carry Includes both delay and talk tine Unavailable Codes A user has made themselves unavailable to take calls from an ACD system for whatever reason It is usual to supply a reason code or unavailable code when going unavailable so to track the reasons why this state has been entered User Login Pin code A unique number that the user enters to associate themselves with the telephone system to inform them they are able
159. g to function e g Analogue trunks GSM gateway trunks BRI ISDN trunks The following method shows how to configure a DID queue group status however the method is the same for DIDs Pilot numbers and Trunks How to Create queue group status for DID groups 1 Click Real Time Status 2 Select the output you wish to create a queue group status for e g DIDs 3 Click Create a New Queue Group Status View the following dialog will appear PEX Head Office Group E All DIDs Edit Title Font Unassigned DIDs Edit Status Font C cence 4 Inthe new dialogue window that appears select the group or groups to include in the resulting window 5 Click OK Chapter 5 9 Real Time Statistics Chapter 6 Real Time Statistics Real Time Statistics Windows Real time statistics allow you to calculate a wide range of statistical values for all the devices users and groups The groups can either be predefined system groups or user defined The system groups are automatically created and devices are assigned to these system groups according to the device type e g Digital Desk Phones User defined groups are created by the application users according to how the devices and users are used in the organisation e g Sales Accounts Statistical periods and calculations Statistics can be calculated in various ways depending on how you want to view your data Each of the statistics windows allow
160. hat extension listed in a group below it Maximum report items limit 50 Report grouped by Extension Report ordered by Time of Call Transferred calls are being reported as a multiple calls Time Of Call Call Type Duration Number 2462 2of0s 2008 06 35 05 Inc 00 00 19 0041330206633 2o 0e 2008 07 33 15 Inc 00 00 37 0056106522752 Totals 00 00 56 Total Cals 2 2471 2000200 08 39 21 Inc 00 00 10 OF S45000598 Totals 00 00 70 Total Calls 1 2476 20002008 01 57 53 Inc 00 00 14 OFG47320476 eof0e 2000 06 04 56 Inc 00 02 25 OF 643602557 Totals 00 02 42 Total Calls 2 2541 2002000 00 32 43 Out Abd 00 00 00 O1737 761201 eolOol2000 06 32 52 Out Abd 00 00 00 O1737761201 2002008 06 33 00 Out Abd 00 00 00 O1737 761201 20002008 08 33 07 Out Abd 00 00 00 017377612701 Extension 2462 is shown with two calls 2471 has 1 call 2578 has 2 calls and 2541 has 4 calls Calls are ordered by ascending time of call earliest first Types of Grouping screens found in the reporting wizard Different report templates provide varying levels of grouping complexity or format dependent on the type of report The simplest type of grouping comprises a drop down menu of device types More complex reports allow you to select the device and select groups and types of device Grouping in Call Detail reports The simplest type of grouping allows you to select the grouping item from a drop down menu Chapter 14 16 Reporting Group Items on Report By Extens
161. he Browse button to select the file containing your extensions to be imported 5 If you are assigning all extensions as a specific type then select it from the type menu 6 If you are importing these extensions to a specific extension group then select that group from the Import to extension group menu 7 Clicking the Create users for named extensions option creates organisational users for each extension see section on organisation users 8 Click Load 9 The Extensions to import grid will populate You can now make final decisions as to which of these to import 10 To edit an entry click on the field in the grid and simply type in the edited value 11 To delete an extension select the row and press your delete key 12 If you make a mistake or delete a row unintentionally simply click the Load button to reload the file 13 Once you are happy with your imported list click OK 14 Your extensions are now imported into the configuration Importing Callers Callers are treated in the same way as devices see example above Simply load the CSV file and select the caller type to import You can edit the loaded list prior to committing the import in the same way as for devices Callers CSV files have three fields namely e Number Numeric no spaces e Alternate Number Numeric no spaces e Name Importing Users Users are imported into organizational groups The f
162. he call How To Select and Playback a call 1 From the view menu select Call Records View or select Calls from the toolbar at the bottom left side of the screen Chapter 7 5 Call Recording By default the call records view will display the last 50 calls for the current day Calls that have been recorded will show a speaker icon meaning they have been recorded To play a call that has been recorded simply double click the speaker icon located in the far left box to play the call 11 11 2008 14 40 Head Office RBar re oh deci tok Sant Laos pio oe betes re H 1111 2008 14 35 Head Office j 4 From the example above only one call has been recorded shown by the speaker icon so you would double click on the speaker for this call This will present the call playback interface e220 10 2008 00 00 m 20 10 2008 23 59 7 5 After you have double clicked the speaker the player will load and play the calls The Call Player MyCalls provides a desktop player similar to many popular MP3 players which will allow the playback of calls and looping of sections of the call for in depth analysis Use the Play Pause and Stop controls for basic playback Rewind and Fast Forward allow you to search through the call quickly Chapter 7 6 Call Recording Call Playback Interface Playhead Position Playhead Timer s i a Play Stop Rewind Pause start amp End Export to File 10
163. he Number DID group You can select a DID group to group this number under The values in this list are configurable under DID Groups The default value is set as None Enable real time statistics This option should be enabled if you want call data collected from the telephone system for this DID to be included in the real time statistics It is good practice for DIDs not used to have this option disabled so as to minimize unnecessary processing Click OK Chapter 8 14 Telephone System Configuration How To Creating a range of DIDs 1 From the MyCalls Telephone System Configuration screen click DIDs 2 Click Create a Range of DIDs in the DID configuration area 3 Inthe dialogue window that appears a number of fields are available for entry Some are mandatory fields for successful setup whilst others are optional inputs FBX Code Number of DIDs Head Office 1 gt Start DID Number DID Group None 4 Number of DIDs Enter here the number of DIDs you wish to create in the range 5 Start DID Enter the number to start your DID range from here This must be the starting number for a valid DID range configured on your telephone system 6 DID group You can select a DID group to group this range under The values in this list are configurable under DID Groups The default value is None Click OK A block of DIDs will now have been inserted into the Configured DIDs list box You should con
164. ield format for users allows more values to be specified in addition to the user name You can specify the following values for a user in the CSV file you create e User Name e Abbreviated name e Password e Email Address e Job Title e Login PIN Numeric no spaces e Extension number Chapter 16 3 Importing Data Into MyCalls How To Importing Users 1 From the organization window Configure gt Organization select organization or one of the organization groups 2 Select Import users Import Users e Import Users Users can be imported from a Comma Separated Value csv file The formatis Name Abbreviation Password Email Address JobTitle Login PIN Default Extension All fields must be present but can be blank The Users loaded can then be edited or deleted if necessary before they are imported into the configuration Filename FBX that users logon to C Users mike Desktop users csv Head Office Users to import Name Job Title Alan Dale Manager Anne Blake Sales Agent Beate Gort Sales Agent Clive Blease Sales Agent Debbie rains i i Sales Agent Derek Jones Sales Agent Edward Foster Sales Agent Frank Abbott Sales Agent Goeff Poulson zen Sales Anent Specify the file to import load and import the users in the same way you load devices see previous section Edit the values if required and click OK The users will be imported into the group Chapter 16 4 Acronyms a
165. ific device or group The ABD Ring setting is specified for groups of devices or users in the operational grade of service configuration and can vary between different groups Long incoming calls Number of connected incoming calls where the duration exceeded the Inc Overflow Call maximum call duration defined in the Grade of Service for that specific device or group The Inc Overflow setting is specified for groups of devices or users in the operational grade of service configuration and can vary between different groups This statistic will include overflowed calls Long incoming wait Number of connected incoming calls where the ring time exceeded the Inc Overflow Ring maximum ring time defined in the Grade of Service for that specific device or group The Inc Overflow Ring setting is specified for groups of devices or users in the operational grade of service configuration and can vary between different groups Long overflow calls Number of connected overflow calls where the duration exceeded the Inc Overflow Call maximum call duration defined in the Grade of Service for that specific device or group The Inc Overflow setting is specified for groups of devices or users in the operational grade of service configuration and can vary between different groups Long overflow waits Number of connected overflowed calls where the ring time exceeded the Inc Overflow Ring maximum ring time defined in the Grade
166. igure the grouping and ordering settings according to the specific report being configured Configure the filtering settings Save and run the report Call detail reports show the following statistics e Time of call e User e Call type e Total Duration e TFR e Caller Name e Dialled Number e Location e Ring time e Handling cost e Call cost e Total cost Total Duration shows duration of each leg of a transferred call If transfers are consolidated then this indicates the cumulative total of all transfers for that call TER indicates the leg of the transferred call where the initial leg of the call is TFR 1 If the transfers are consolidated then this column indicates the count of transfer legs Chapter 14 26 Reporting Group Summary reports show the following statistics e Number of calls Answered Abandoned Outgoing Transferred e Average Duration Answered Outgoing e Average Ring time Answered Abandoned e Number of Long waits e Number of long calls e Number of short calls e Costs Call costs Taxes Fixed costs Handling costs Total costs Profit Reports involving time intervals and profiles Several report templates have been specifically designed to provide statistics broken down and analysed in definable time periods There are three basic report templates which do this e Summary Time Distribution e Summary over same time interval e Summary comparison Time Intervals v Repor
167. imes are and if we are operating in the target times If not then we can use other reporting tools to determine if our target times are realistic or not Call Summary Time Distribution Created On 24 10 2008 10 14 20 Covering Period 01 08 2008 00 00 00 to 10 08 2008 23 59 59 Report Filtered To Call types used for first value set are Incoming Call types used for second value set are Incoming Abandoned Time Distribution for call parameter Ring Time Starting interval in seconds 10 Incrementing interval in seconds 5 Ending interval in seconds 60 Report ordered by Interval Transferred calls are being reported as a multiple calls ncoming Incoming Abandoned Interval Period sec Number of Calls Number of Calls 0 10 4 483 164 11 15 953 42 16 20 401 41 21 25 342 60 26 30 403 64 31 35 361 38 36 40 189 31 41 45 100 53 46 50 84 64 51 55 43 39 56 60 35 34 gt 61 243 239 To set up the above report we would set the configuration shown First Set of Call Types to Include Together Second Set of Call Types to Include Together E Unknown Incoming E Select All Select All E Incoming Conference H E Incoming Abandoned E Incoming Abandoned Voice M Select None F Incoming Abandoned Voice M Select None E Incoming Transferred hi E Incoming Transferred Start Value s Interval 5 End Value 5 10 5 60 Call Parameter Order Report Output By Ring Time Interval call type summary comparison Th
168. ine periods Certain reports allow the setting of up to two periods e g 9 00 12 00 14 00 18 00 This allows you to include or exclude certain periods during the day e g Shift periods Lunch breaks etc Limiting the report length You may specify the maximum number of records a report can contain or specify that you wish to see all records matching the criteria defined in the report configuration To limit the number of items simply type the number of records into the textbox Number of Items on Report Limit number of items 50 Display all matching items Ordering Results You can specify how you wish the results ordered in the report Specifying Time of call for instance will display your results in order from the earliest time through to the latest time alternatively specifying Duration would display calls from the shortest to the longest call Order Report Output By Time of Call Time of Call Call Cost Handling Cost Duration Ring Time Held Time Chapter 14 15 Reporting Grouping results Grouping results allows you to specify which results need to be kept together in the report The grouping options depend on the type of report being produced Example Grouping by extension You wish to report on extensions showing the number of calls made by each extension within a certain group Group by extension which means that each extension will be shown with all the calls associated with t
169. ing DID Handling Costs sou cisis prlon a cseacindicapidaeneeeiaar as stele ates S 10 HOW TO Editing DIDAanNdINE COSTS seni N 10 Editing Pilot N mber Randine COStSorsinsidan a i 11 a MyCalls Advanced Call Management System How To Editing Pilot Number Handling COStS cccccssecccessecccsecceesceceececeeaeeeeeneeeeescesaneceeeeneeees 11 LOCOS DOC COSTS eta aaa ecient ae eee cee eae 11 Edit Local Area COGS sist Sassi anc day N N cacy seamauic Gonatesnens 11 White Kingdom Local Area CodeS x iiiaisia aces etc cey os seeaes ed seat noe Pevaog sabe onedcy nan caanine anes aedwealanceauanea 12 HOW TO Editing Local Area CodeS necne a AE sedans av adap ee 12 EGIL Camel ASSOC AMON Sais taht cccat ea tencias touteaten NE 13 HOw TO Editing Carrier aSSOClatiOns insisi T T TA ed ence ea eae 13 Edit Pront Margin ssiicss oss a Aelia i cael ieaea seesaek asec tas we cae eesoieee ov nacas eee 14 HOW TO Editing Pront Margins svciicatectss caciectacAcclabsaeedia de taudeducdlondeaiad A T 14 Edit Was A hel saandiae bos hecanetee cia ana a esses 15 How To Editing TAX OS secssaca decscosssarssarecceauehduancbatorieeaaiet weansnesaaneeserbeaaadbedah ae nahi aerate daseeeuseeeaateenaees 15 CITIES esses arta Sates vaccine onal aaa donee oc dhe cet a Syne aeaeoacee a dsea us ded ca ecole Aa 15 Adda NEW Carrier enia abate aan aap eans nage aan patna a npachatogsesuarananienssioor gaan sees 16 HOWTO Adda MGW Carlen ciicsacacceessandseaciagstanceiasgatun
170. ing No Answer Ring Time k ac Email Handling a Held F Fax Handling 3 F General L Incoming Meal ort th Incoming Outgoing Meeting i s Natural Break Incoming Ring Refreshment Zi Longest Abandoned Ring Longest Incoming Ring Longest Ring No Answer Ring Time Maximum Call Time Minimum Abandoned Ring Minimum Incoming Ring Minimum Ring No Answer Ring Time Available Information Preview Report Outgoing Call Durations gt Ring No Answer Ring Time Costs d Time To Answer gt j Call Counts gt Cancel Call Count Percentages gt Users gt F TUT i Performance gt 0 50 00 00 23 z The following is a summary of the various report parameters A detailed definition of each parameter is to be found at the end of this section Custom Report Parameters fall into the following main categories For custom summary reports e Call Durations e Costs e Call Counts e Call Count Percentages e Users Chapter 14 37 Reporting e Performance For custom detail reports e General e Trunks e Extension e DIDs e Pilot numbers e Account codes e Callers e Costs e Times Custom Summary Reports Call Durations Call durations show you how long a specific type of call or how long a particular phase of a call has taken call Durations General The call durations are broken down into Absolute Durations e g a call lasted 10 minutes or the longest call for a given extension las
171. ing can help improve complaints handling by listening to calls and working out ways of dealing with awkward customers or feeding back problems to product designers and sales staff Call recording can be used to improve coaching and training of staff hold regular call reviews and pick out good and poor practices Develop a complaints handling procedure and ensure all staff are involved in developing this procedure based on real call experiences Completion codes can be used to categorise the status of a complaint once the call has finished These codes can be included in reports to analyse where complaints are handled successfully are they passed on and dealt with and do you get back to the customer with a solution etc Use reports statistics to determine how quickly complaints are being dealt with and if complaints are being routed to the right staff You may need to provide more DIDs so that more choices are presented to the caller prior to connecting to a staff member Manage returned calls by generating unreturned call reports or using the real time unreturned calls grid to ensure you are responding to these calls Chapter 1 19 Welcome to MyCalls Generate new business Improve customer retention Use Call Recording to review call content Use the statistical data generated from MyCalls to determine the best times to make specific types of calls Experiment with different types of customer your pitch and different times of day for the c
172. ing from call metrics per individual device or user to group statistics and time profile information which breaks down information into what happened at any half hour interval on any given day If the standard reports are insufficient for your needs you can generate custom reports where you define exactly what information is included in the report and the parameters are wide and exhaustive Your reports can be filtered to specific groups call types DIDs ACD groups in fact almost any combination of call information can be defined within your filter to give you the exact information you require You can save your customised reports for later use and you can even schedule the reports to run at regular intervals Scheduled reports give you the added advantage of being able to automatically distribute the reports to relevant people within the organisation Management by exception One very big feature of MyCalls is the management by exception This allows you to set up a series of rules which if broken create an alarm or alert informing you of the fact These alarms can be used to indicate a wide variety of events and conditions such as e Trunk lockup e IT System related issues e Toll Fraud and telephone misuse e Reduction in service levels e Excessive call costs being incurred There are many more available but ultimately this means that you can set up MyCalls to inform you when there is a problem and relieve managers of the need to continu
173. ing perspectives System perspective Trunk loading how many trunks are required when do trunks become overloaded resulting in busy signals Customer perspective Wait times Call duration Call resolution was the result of the call satisfactory Staff Performance Number of calls answered Number of calls abandoned Time to Answer TTA or ring time Average Time to Answer ATA Service Level Call duration After call work Breakdown of a call Let s look at a diagram which represents the different stages of a call transaction Caller load Agent load Call answered by agent Delay In queue A Call Connected Ring on extension 4 Ring Time Ring Delay Trunk load Chapter 1 10 Welcome to MyCalls The diagram shows a typical call which will have several phases 1 Ring Delay 2 Time in queue and or Ring on Extension 3 Call talk time 4 After call work Wrap Up Ring delay is the time taken to initially answer a call The length of this delay depends on the number of lines you have available and how the incoming calls are dealt with If you are directing calls to an auto attendant then the ring delay should be short and the caller can be given the opportunity to pre select the department they wish to be transferred to If the incoming call is directed straight to a queue or an extension group then the ring delay will depend on the number of available agents Time in queue is th
174. ingle Account Code ssseessseessereesresrrrssressrresrrersrerosreeseressrrosrereseeeserreseers 16 How To Creating a range of Account Codes esssesesseeesrrresesrrressrerssreressrrersserreserereseereseerereseeeese 16 How ToO Editing existing ACCOUNE COGE Siricius TEE O AT 17 S MyCalls Advanced Call Management System Confieurme ACD Env IFONIMeENECGeVICES ricki casicccetedintcteasieedtaalanattandnedeenaatetandanautubee eee ienataudeactuadectotas 17 PHOENOMDO Siora hearse iea ae cocoate cies dade iea N ial a ceae anata susp ene ee cee oe aetna Ay Creating and Editing Pilot NUMDE S tac eA oe 18 How To Creating a single PIOC NUMBER eerca E A E 18 How To Creating a range of Pilot NUMDELS essssesssusessensssrrrseserresrrerssrrresssrersserreserersseeresssrereseerese 19 HOW TO Editing existing PIOtNUMDETS armen a A 19 WSErIOPINS and Pn COde Sarriera a a TE TE EAE TEE ai 20 Create Edit User logins and Pim COUCS 1 ania N cacooestasedenaes 20 How To Creating a single NEW User LOBIN cccceescccessecceeseeeeeneeceenceceueceeeneceeeeeesenceeseneceneneeees 20 How To Creating a range Of USer LOINS ccccccssscececeesececeesecceeeescceccseececeeececseuceeesensecetsunesss 21 How To Editing existing User LOGINS cccccsssccccsececesececeneceeensccceeececeeceeeneeeseusceseueceseneceneneeees 21 SOLID COMMIS Ut OMe sates ters cae arth Seatac Scand es sates ce ness canes ee 21 SVEM EI OUPS aa a a a E N ra A S
175. inserted into the Configured Pilot Numbers list box You should configure these pilot numbers with appropriate name pilot number types and groups using procedures described later in this topic before clicking the OK button to complete your pilot number creation process Note that the pilot numbers you create should correspond to those configured in the telephone system How To Editing existing Pilot Numbers From the MyCalls Telephone System Configuration screen click Pilot Numbers Click Create or Edit a Pilot Number in the Pilot Number configuration area In the dialog box that appears click the Edit button to the right of the pilot number you want to edit In the second dialog box that appears configure a Name for the pilot number and if required select a Pilot Number Group Pilot Number Type and enable or disable the real time statistics option for this extension PBX Code Number Head Office 11 Name Type Unassigned Pilot Number Group None e F Enable Real Time Statistics Chapter 8 19 Telephone System Configuration 5 Click OK 6 Repeat these stages for as many pilot numbers as you need to configure 7 Click OK User logins and Pin Codes User Logins are the codes that users enter into their telephone handset to start receiving calls in an ACD environment They are sometimes referred to as PIN codes This is the way that the system recognises that someo
176. ion a Extension Name Least Cost Routing Pilot Number Pilot Number Name Trunk Trunk Name User ki Time of Call mM Grouping in Group Summary reports More advanced grouping gives you the option to select a group of devices Extensions DDIs etc and then pick from the list of groups defined for that device If you select Pilot Numbers for example then a list of the Pilot groups will appear from which you may select one or more for grouping purposes Device Type Pilot Number Groups W All ACD Queues All Hunt Groups Fil All Pilot Numbers Include sub groups of selected groups Filtering results Setting the filter groups To ensure the reports you are configuring only produce the information you require you will need to apply filters to the results Filters allow only the specified information to be processed in the final report For example you may want to produce a report grouped by class of call i e incoming outgoing etc but only detailing the calls to and from the sales department To accomplish this you would specify a call detail report specifying the class of call i e Incoming Outgoing etc as the grouping field but applying an extension group filter and selecting the sales group in the filter details Chapter 14 17 Reporting Setting filters is a two stage process 1 Specify which devices users call types etc you wish to apply filters to Ca
177. ion would be counted as two calls Consolidating would treat them as a single call Group Summary Created On 21 11 2006 14 51 14 Covering Period 01 08 2008 00 00 00 to 30 06 2008 23 59 59 Report Filtered To Only include call types Incoming or Incoming Abandoned or Incoming Transferred show summaries for the device type Trunk Transferred calls are being reported as a single call Number ofCals Average Duration Average Ring Time Num Long short Group Ans Abd Out Tir Ans Out Ans Abd Wait Cals Calls Head Office All Trunks 29091 3343 0 3202 00 02 48 00 00 00 00 00 19 00 00 49 0 0 756 Call rates Using time profile reports we can get a breakdown of call statistics for specific intervals during the reporting period These intervals can show us how call rates vary for each day of the week or they can be very specific by analysing the call statistics for each Half hour of the day over the reporting periods This particular report accumulates all the data for the respective intervals over the reporting period so if you were reporting on Day of week the total calls for Monday would be the total calls for all Mondays in the period The following graph is compiled from an exported MyCalls report showing genuine data for 1 month of calls Chapter 1 6 Welcome to MyCalls No of calls by day of week The next example shows the same 1 month period but shows the accumulated half hour of each day No of calls 23 30 00 00 2
178. ional costs from the drop down list which can be accessed for each trunk in the Additional Cost column These will need to have been previously created through the Additional Costs under Fixed Costs 6 Click OK Chapter 12 5 Call Costing Editing Fixed Extension Costs Fixed extension costs are the total cost associated with the extension type and one other user defined additional cost if you wish to apply it also to the overall costing of the extension For example you could put in an additional cost which could be applied to desk phones with a larger screen How To Editing fixed Extension costs 1 Click the Costs option from the Configure menu or clicking the icon on the toolbar 2 Expand the Fixed Costs category in the left pane of the window This will display all available PBXs in your enterprise 3 Click Extension Costs 4 Click Edit Fixed Extension Costs Number Name Type Additional Cost 208 208 Unassigned None 235 Reception Digital Desk Phone Mone 236 236 Unassigned Mone 237 237 Unassigned Mone 300 300 Unassigned Mone 301 301 Unassigned Mone 302 302 Unassigned None 404 304 Unassigned None 5 This window will list all extension numbers along with their names and their defined device type as set through the telephone configuration or auto learned from the PBX You can select one of the additional costs from the drop down list which can be accessed for each extension i
179. is report allows comparison of two different calls types at regular intervals The intervals can be multiples of e Minute e Hour Chapter 14 30 Reporting e Day e Week The report collates statistics for the specified intervals for the duration of the reporting period Call Type Summary Comparison Created On 23 10 2008 11 41 11 Covering Period 01 08 2008 00 00 00 to 02 08 2008 23 59 59 Report Filtered To Call types used for first value set are Call types used for second value set are Summary of calls arranged into time intervals of 4 Hour Report ordered by Interval Transferred calls are being reported as a multiple calls 1 Num of Max Ring Avg Ring Max Avg Num of Max Ring Avg Ring Max Avg Interval Period Calis Time Time Duration Duration Calis Time Time Duration Duration 01 08 2008 00 00 00 01 08 2008 04 00 00 5 00 00 49 00 00 40 00 00 24 00 00 04 5 00 00 49 00 00 40 00 00 24 00 00 04 01 08 2008 04 00 00 01 08 2008 08 00 00 20 00 00 13 00 00 06 00 02 14 00 00 30 20 00 00 13 00 00 06 00 02 14 00 00 30 01 08 2008 08 00 00 01 08 2008 12 00 00 941 00 04 31 00 00 14 00 39 13 00 01 50 941 00 04 31 00 00 14 00 39 13 00 01 50 01 08 2008 12 00 00 01 08 2008 16 00 00 1 007 00 13 32 00 00 12 00 45 00 00 01 52 1 007 00 13 32 00 00 12 00 45 00 00 01 52 01 08 2008 16 00 00 01 08 2008 20 00 00 372 00 02 33 00 00 10 00 23 27 00 01 19 372 00 02 33 00 00 10 00 23 27 00 01 19 01 08 2008 20 00 00 02 08 2008 00
180. ist all extension numbers along with their extension names defined device type and extension group their associated with as set through the telephone configuration or auto learned from the PBX In the Hourly Cost column you can assign per extension a pro rata hourly rate You can copy a value to multiple extensions by right clicking the mouse button and copying then selecting and pasting onto the other extensions 6 Click OK Chapter 12 9 Call Costing Editing Account Code Handling Costs Account code handling costs are used to specify pro rata hourly rates that will be applied and charged for an account code whilst handling a call How To Editing Account Code Handling costs 1 Select the Costs option from the Configure menu or click the icon on the toolbar 2 Expand the Handling Costs category in the left pane of the window This will display all available PBXs in your enterprise Expand the PBX you want to configure the costs for 3 Click the Account Code Costs option 4 Click Edit Account Code Handling Costs Number Name Group Hourly Cost 110 White Goods None 0 00 111 TV sales None 0 00 112 Book Sales None 0 00 5 This window will list all account codes along with their account code names and their account code groups as set through the telephone configuration or auto learned from the PBX In the Hourly Cost column you can assign per account code a pro rata
181. istics as a single call This allows you to decide which way you want to see the call statistic for transferred calls Filtering When setting up a report you usually don t want to see all the possible information relating to a particular aspect of the call data If you are viewing extension statistics for example you might want to see only a particular range or group of extensions or even an individual extension To accomplish this you can specify a set of filters for the report The exact filtering available depends on the type of report being generated The initial filter screen will allow you to specify groups of devices or data that you wish to filter on When you have done that you will then be presented with a series of screens which allow you to specify detailed filtering information J i tip Detailed reports covering long time periods can result in delays whilst the reports are generated Scheduling these sorts of reports to run out of hours is recommended Chapter 14 13 Reporting Setting the Reporting period The reporting period is defined as the first stage of the report creation wizard There are various parameters available dependent on the complexity of the required report The different forms presented by the wizard can include the following settings Basic Time and Date Entry You will be presented with the options to select a Regular period or a Custom period i Call Details Configuration
182. it PBX Configuration E PBXs Sieg Head Office iy Call Recording H i Agent Control E F Call Control E Devices H Groups Ef Unavailable Codes 3 You are presented with a dialog panel which allows the editing of various parameters not all these parameters can be changed FEX Code Node Area Code International Code Country Head Office D 01606 00 United Kingdom Admin User None Select Edit Country Numbering Plan 4 PBX Code read only Displays the PBX Code name assigned to the PBX 5 Area Code your local area code allows MyCalls to recognize local calls 6 International Code Enter your international code 7 Country read only 8 Edit Country numbering plan see next section 9 Admin User Allows you to set a default admin user for the PBX as follows 10 Click Select Select User dialog appears 11 Type the initial of the user you wish to set as the admin user 12 Select the user from the list and click select 13 Click OK Chapter 8 7 Telephone System Configuration Country Numbering Plans How To Creating Country Numbering Plans 1 To cater for numbering systems in different countries MyCalls allows the entry of various parts constituting a telephone number Costing Type Trunk Prefix Minumum Area Code Digits Maximum Area Code Digits UK 0 2 B 6 B Minumum Subscriber Digits Maximum Subscriber Digits 3 G E G Fixed Format Numbers eg Xxx
183. k alarm schedule and the toll fraud alarm with a O minute call duration would be assigned the out of hours and weekend schedules Alarm schedules can also be configured to trigger every time the condition is broken or every X times Useful if you have an operating value that is very close to an alarm limit and the figure quite often breaks the limit These types of limits have worked very successfully when connecting to a PBX that uses a very unstable WAN connection In this scenario the no data from PBX was set to 10 minutes and on occasions the link would be down for 20 30 minutes at a time and unfortunately there was little that could be done about that by placing an occurrence threshold on the schedule that was set to 4 it meant that if the alarm fired three times then it was connected then the alarm didn t trigger but if it happened four times in a row then the alarm was raised Alarm schedules can also be limited to a fixed amount of notifications per hour An alarm should be notified every GOCUTEMCES Notifications should be distributed every time they occur Upto go notifications per hour Alarm Distribution Lists Alarm Distribution Lists determine who should be informed if an alarm condition is broken There are four mechanisms for informing people that an alarm has been triggered All running copies of MyCalls client application will be informed by default See Real Time List Views The user can then specify one or
184. k the Enable Call Playback box 3 Click OK to save any changes For more details on users and groups see the Organisation configuration section For more details on login pin configuration see the Telephone system device configuration section Chapter 7 2 Call Recording Restricting Call Playback To enable or disable the recording of certain types of calls or calls made to or from certain parts of your organization you can define recording rules These rules enable or disable specific devices users and call types from being recorded This allows you to override the normal rules governing users as described above However recording rules cannot enable a user to listen to a wider range of calls than their position in the organisation allows For example a user can only ever listen to their own Calls however you could specifically disable calls on an extension within a group from being recorded How To Configure Call Recording Rules 1 From the menu select Configure gt Telephone system gt PBX gt Call Recording Elf PBXs S Head Office i f Agent Control E FI Call Control E GI Devices H Groups 2 Select the Edit Call Recorder Configuration 3 The Edit Call Recorders window will be displayed select the edit button for the recorder for which you wish to set rules Edit Call Recorders Eee Edit Call Recorders To edit an individual call recorder click the edit butto
185. l Calls Abandoned Chapter 6 12 Real Time Statistics Avg Incoming Call Wait Time Avg Incoming Call Call Time Avg e J J J J J Overflow Call Wait Time Avg Overflow Call Call Time Avg Outgoing Call Call Time Avg Internal Call Call Time Avg Abandoned Call Wait Time Avg General Service Level Avg Abandoned Service Level No Of Long Waiting Incoming Calls No Long Waiting Overflowed Calls No Of Long Incoming Chapter 6 13 Real Time Statistics No Of Long Overflowed No Of Long Outgoing No Of Long Internal Calls No Of Long Waiting Abandoned Abandoned Service Level Chapter 6 14 Real Time Statistics How To Creating a single value window 1 Select the group you wish to show statistics for from the single value window list 2 Select Call Rate or Performance 3 Select the statistic that you wish to view from the list 4 Click Create a New Real Time Parameter Window 5 Inthe dialog window that appears you can alter the interval period choose a group alter the time and tick if you want to show a single value FEX Display Values Head Office Historical Current Only Interval Period Group Daily z All Account Codes z Refresh Ti me s 10 Ea Show Single Value Title Arg Ine Wait Time isibalit Show Tithe Show Group Show Interval Show Value Show PRX Included Incoming Call Types
186. l pages by clicking the Save All option in the Pages sub menu of the layout menu Copying Pages How To Copy pages You may wish to create a page that is similar to an existing page you have available To cut down the time it takes to setup a page layout you can use the Copy Page feature in the Pages sub menu of the layout menu You will be prompted to provide a name for your copied layout page Enter a name and click the OK button Layout Page Name A copy of your existing page will now be displayed and available from the layout page selection tool This new page should have the name you previously provided and you can alter existing settings to your requirements Chapter 4 7 Screen Layouts Reloading Pages How To Reload Pages If you have made significant changes to a layouts page but decide that you preferred the pages the way they were before then you can revert them back to their previous state so long as you have not saved the changes in the meantime From the layout menu select the Pages sub menu and then click on the Reload option Your pages will now be restored to their previous saved state without any unsaved changes you have made since You can view your screen as an Agent Desktop user would see it by choosing the View as Agent Desktop option from the Pages sub menu of the Layout menu This will remove any real time window control boxes and lock the windows on the sc
187. lable The ACD system is set up so that agents must put themselves back into the available mode after completing any after call work Most Frequent Calls Report Report that provides a list of the most frequent numbers dialled or answered The report can be configured to include or exclude and combination of call types or device Next Available Agent A call distribution method that sends calls to the next agent who becomes available The method seeks to maintain an equal load across skill groups or services When there is no queue next available agent reverts to longest available agent Non ACD Calls Inbound calls that are directed to an agent s extension rather than to a general group These may be personal calls or calls from customers who dial the agents extension numbers Offered Call Offered calls include all times a call has been presented to an agent either answered or not Off Peak Periods of time other than the call centre s busiest periods Also a term used to describe periods of time when long distance carriers provide lower rates Overflow Calls that flow from one group or site to another More specifically intraflow happens when calls flow between agent groups and interflow is when calls flow out of the ACD to another site Other ACD Calls Calls routed via an ACD queue to an agent but not from the queue in which a supervisor may be responsible Pilot Number A number that represents an ACD or hunt group A call can
188. lecting them and clicking Add Available Report Items Selected Report Items E A Report tems Daily Agent Activity H Mitaa Fenced Daily Costs by Telephone Number we as a Ald Daily Incoming Abandoned Calls Sy Babs or Daily Incoming Performance H Monthly Reports Seer Daily List Misdialled Outgoing Calls H E Weekly Reports ancien Daily List of Personal Calls Daily Outgoing Call Perfomance Daily Summary of ACD Group Performance List All Abandoned Calls Chapter 14 44 Reporting 8 Click Next 9 Specify the format in the next window 10 Click Finish When the schedule runs and is going via email then there is an email generated and each of the report items is included as attachments Chapter 14 45 System Utilities Chapter 1 5 System Utilities System configuration System configuration menu provides a selection of system related utility functions To access the menu click System and select the required function from the drop down list e Backup your database e Database information e Remove unwanted information e Importa bill e Re cost calls e Import Costing Files e Area Code Import System User Automatic Database Backup ee Backup Database Database Information Remove Unwanted Information br i Import Bill Re Cost Calls Import File 4 Ares Code Import Automatic Backup Create automated schedules for database backup There are two databases which can b
189. lieve that people should not have to spend a long time analyzing report information just to find that everything is OK This has historically been the case in companies that use call accounting or other telephone management software for many years MyCalls is designed to be used with management by exception That is the system is configured to watch for specific conditions and only inform users when one of those conditions has been broken This then leaves the supervisors and PBX administrators free to do other activities Specify when Alarms are active To facilitate the automated notification of alarm conditions MyCalls is provided with an alarm scheduler which allows you to specify when alarms can be active You can create as many alarm schedules as required e g Daytime Night time Weekends and apply the schedules to the different alarms that you create For example you may want to activate alarms from certain extensions out of hours to catch any unauthorised usage Specify who receives Alarm notifications Generating alarms is only one part of the equation In order to make the MyCalls system really work for you the alarms need to be sent to the people in the organisation who need to know about it MyCalls provides distribution lists to do just that You can set up multiple distribution lists which allows you to specify different recipients for different types of alarms For example System alarms may be sent to your IT specialists possibly o
190. lk time for extensions within various groups Longer call times can indicate that the extension is taking longer to close a sale Look at average call durations and where specific calls are longer or shorter than this based on time of day and extension number etc MyCalls provides a single system that can consolidate call traffic information for each site and allow easy comparisons between them Out of hours operations If you operate out of hours or need to handle out of hours calls in a special way MyCalls can be configured to give specific reports on this data Like the routing of calls to out of office extensions you may have to program the PBX to enable some of the features The Out of Hours configuration may involve Forwarding calls at specific times Voicemail routing Monitoring special out of hours numbers Monitoring fraudulent use of extensions out of hours Monitoring known Emergency numbers and their usage What types of calls are being made out of hours and can this be handled more economically There may be a lot of mobile calls being made out of hours where an email would be just as effective and much cheaper Chapter 1 18 Welcome to MyCalls 7 a tip NB The configuration for out of office calls will vary between different PBX systems and may require some specific PBX setup to achieve complete integration What do want to improve on MyCalls can be a central part of your strategy to improve man
191. ll Details Configuration Specify the devices to filter the report to The report can filter the results to only include calls that match selected criteria such as only list calls that were handled by Extension Group Sales Select the types thay you wish to filter the results to The aoe will be configured later in the wizard depending on what you select If you do not wish filter the results to a certain type of device then do not not select that option E Account Codes Groups fa Sites Bilis Ll Eesting Tye E CallersGroups Ectensions Groups Call Durations Call Types E PBXs E Trunks Groups Users Organisation Groups F DIDs Groups F Dialed Received Numbers Include the filter description in the report 2 Select the detailed information for each of the types of filtering selected in stage 1 Each of the device filters defined in the first stage will cause a detail filter screen to be displayed This detailed screen will appear as part of the sequence of screens for configuring the report and will present you with the detailed information appertaining to that device For example the screenshot shown below illustrates the detailed selections for extension devices Extension Groups to Include All Auto Attendants F All Cordless Phones Hi Select All All Desk Phones 7 All Digital Phones All Extension Types Select None E All Non PEX Phones Include Deleted Extensions Type part of a number he
192. llers Costs Alarms Chapter 9 2 Organisation and Users Backup Restore database Remove unwanted information Organisation Group Configuration Organisational Groups are the logical groups of employees that exist within the organization They are arranged ina hierarchy and groups can exist within other groups It is typical that an organization be split up into different departments and then maybe different teams How To Creating a new Organisation group 1 From the Organisational Groups Configuration screen click Organisation Ey Organisation Gf All Users click Create a New Group In the Create a New Organisational Group window you must enter a name for the group and you can enter notes to describe the group Name Enter a name to describe the organisation group you are creating Click OK Chapter 9 3 Organisation and Users How To Editing organisation group configuration 1 From the Organisational Group Configuration screen click to expand Organisation and select the group you want to edit 4 Organisation Eleaf Office admin E A Customer service AA administrator ay i Mark max Click Edit Organisation Group in the Organisational Group Configuration area In the Edit an Organisational Group window that appears you can enter notes to describe your selected group In the Group Members window you will see members currently assigned to the
193. lot numbers ACD queues Hunt Groups and Trunks Having predefined groups for these devices is a convenience but normally you will expect to create your own user defined groups A device can only be in one user defined group but will be a member of several system groups system groups A system group is a group of devices defined by their type rather than being assigned to a specific user defined group Extension type groups Analogue phone All phones of an analogue nature Analogue user phone Analogue system phones Announcement port Extensions used to play messages Announcement port Auto attendant Automatically answer calls Auto Attendant Cordless phones Not fixed in a specific location Cordless phones Desk Phones Phones fixed to a desk Analogue Desk phone Digital Desk phone IP Desk phone Digital Phones Phones of a digital nature Digital Desk phones IP Desk phones All non PBX phones Cellular phones land lines or pagers where a bill can be imported All system phones All extensions that cannot be answered Announcement ports auto by a user attendant voicemail All user PBX phones All extensions a user can answer i e it excludes system phones All user phones All extensions a user can answer including non PBX phones All Voicemail ports All extensions which record messages left by callers Pilot Number groups Chapter 8 22 Telephone System Configuration All Analogue trunks All trunks connected as analogu
194. ltaneously in a given period If this is approaching the maximum trunks available then we may have to factor that in when we produce a forecast to avoid unnecessary busy signals due to the trunks operating at maximum capacity Report Filtered To Only include PEX Head Office Only include trunk groups All Trunks Summary of trunk activity arranged into time intervals of 1 Hour Report ordered by Utilisation Maximum First Time at Interval Period Trunks Maximum 26 06 2008 10 00 00 26 06 2008 11 00 00 24 26 08 2008 10 19 56 26 06 2008 11 00 00 26 08 2008 12 00 00 20 26 08 2008 17 36 01 26 06 2008 16 00 00 26 08 2008 17 00 00 24 26 06 2006 16 46 51 1808 2008 10 00 00 16 08 2008 11 00 00 ef 1808 2008 10 53 45 1808 2008 11 00 00 16 08 2008 12 00 00 24 1808 2008 11 31 46 1808 2008 16 00 00 16 08 2008 17 00 00 23 18 08 2008 16 03 54 20 08 2008 09 00 00 26 08 2008 10 00 00 21 26 06 2008 09 11 12 2ff 06 2008 10 00 00 27 08 2008 11 00 00 22 27 08 2008 10 19 01 0406 2008 15 00 00 0406 2008 16 00 00 20 0408 2008 15 50 39 0406 2008 10 00 00 04 08 2008 11 00 00 26 04 06 2008 10 29 30 040 2008 11 00 00 04 08 2008 12 00 00 oe 04 06 2008 11 55 46 06 08 2008 17 00 00 06 08 2008 12 00 00 21 06 06 2008 11 53 58 1108 2008 10 00 00 11 08 2008 11 00 00 22 11 08 2008 10 34 59 11 08 2008 12 00 00 11 08 2008 13 00 00 24 11 08 2008 12 21 56 So far we have been able to develop a picture of Peak call times Trunk usag
195. luded on the report is user selectable along with the headings and widths of the columns used to display the information Custom Call Details Daily List of Personal Calls Created On 18 11 2008 11 59 59 Covering Period 18 11 2008 00 00 00 to 18 11 2008 23 59 59 Report Filtered To Only include caller groups All Personal Callers Only include call types Incoming or Incoming Conference or Incoming Abandoned or Incoming Abandoned Voice Mail or Incoming Transferred or Incoming Pickup or Incoming Divert or Incoming Intraflow or Incoming Overflow or Incoming Internal or Incoming Internal Abandoned or Incoming Internal Overflow or Outgoing or Outgoing Conference or Outgoing Abandoned or Outgoing Transferred or Outgoing Op Assist or Outgoing Line to Line Include all matching items in the report Report grouped by Extension Report ordered by Time of Call Transferred calls are being reported as a multiple calls Time Of Call Extension Call Type Duration Number Caller Name O iS s Totals Total Calls Totals Total Calls Chapter 14 5 Reporting Daily Incoming Performance Provides a summary of incoming call performance The information included on the report is user selectable along with the headings and widths of the columns used to display the information Custom Group Summary Daily Incoming Performance Created On 16 11 2006 11 26 41 CoveringPenod 18 11 2008 00 00 00 to 16 11 2008 23 59 59 Report Filtered To show
196. ly 8 Enter a costing value in the Cost column and select one of the costing periods from the Cost Period column Periods selectable are hourly daily weekly monthly quarterly and yearly 9 You can continue to add further additional costs or edit the existing costs 10 To remove an additional cost item you have created select the item from the list of additional costs and click Remove 11 Click OK Chapter 12 4 Call Costing Editing Fixed Trunk Costs Fixed trunk costs are the total cost associated with the trunk s type and one other user defined additional cost if you wish to apply it also to the overall costing of the trunk How To Editing fixed Trunk costs 1 Select the Costs option from the Configure menu or click the icon on the toolbar 2 Expand the Fixed Costs category in the left pane of the window This will display all available PBXs in your enterprise Expand the PBX you want to configure costs for 3 Click the Trunk Costs option 4 Click Edit Fixed Trunk Costs window Number Name Type Additional Cost 001 001 Unassigned None 002 002 Unassigned None 005 O05 Unassigned None 006 006 Unassigned None 007 007 Unassigned None 015 015 Unassigned None 5 This window will list all trunk line numbers along with their names and their defined trunk type as set through the telephone configuration or auto learned from the PBX You can select one of the addit
197. m related settings Email Information can be sent to one or more email address To achieve this the system needs to be set up with an email sending mechanism via an smtp service Chapter 8 28 Telephone System Configuration How to Set up an Email server SMTP mail server name of your email sending server e g mail myco com or smtp myco com Email address of sender This will appear in the from field of any emails sent by the system This should be a valid email address on the server and ideally will relate to MyCalls e g Mycalls my com Login Username username if required to access your SMTP service Login Password password if required to access your SMTP service Test this will send a test email to a known email address to check your system is capable of sending emails using the settings you have specified FTP Information can be deposited as a file on an FTP server for later retrieval by an FTP client application or web browser How to Set up an FTP server 1 Configuration gt System settings 2 FTP server hostname name of your ftp server e g ftp myco com 3 Anonymous Defines if the account on the ftp server is capable of handling uploads from an anonymous user in which case a username and password are not required 4 Login Username username required to access your FTP service 5 Login Password password required to access your FTP service 6 Test this will test the connection to the FTP se
198. mp Glossary Chapter 1 Acronyms amp Glossary Acronyms ACD Automatic Call Distributor ACW After Call Work AHT Average Handling Time ANI Automatic Number Identification also called caller ID ASA Average Speed of Answer ASP Application Service Provider ASR Automatic Speech Recognition ATA Average lime to Abandonment ATB All Trunks Busy CCR Customer Controlled Routing CED Caller Entered Digits CIS Customer Information System CLEC Competitive Local Exchange Carrier CLI Calling Line Identity CLID Calling Line Identification CMS Call Management System CO Central Office CPE Customer Premises Equipment CRM Customer Relationship Management CSR Customer Service Representative CTI Computer Telephony Integration DID Direct Inward Dialling DN Dialled Number DND Do not disturb DNIS Dialled Number Identification Service DTMF Dual Tone Multi frequency EWT Expected Wait Time FCR First Call Resolution FIFO First In First Out FX Foreign Exchange Line GOS Grade of Service IM Instant Messaging IP Internet Protocol ISDN Integrated Services Digital Network ISP Internet Service Provider IVR Interactive Voice Response Chapter 17 1 Acronyms amp Glossary IXC Interexchange Carrier KM Knowledge Management KPI Key Performance Indicator LAN Local Area Network LEC Local Exchange Carder MIS Management Information System NCC Network Control Centre NOC Network Operations Centre PABX Private Automatic Bra
199. multi skilled filling various roles Where do start Do you need to retain details of call content What type of organisation do Are your y have departments geared around specific roles Highly skilled staff Home Workers Provide and Auto attendant but need to ensure we respond to the calls during office hours Is your business centralised or distributed Combination Do you have out of hours requirements OTR Sales force We provide an emergency out of hours service Central office Multiple Branches Service oriented Enquiry Support Emergency Service Legal Financial Call Centre Retail Wholesale Dealer Travel Estate Agencies Tele Sales Finding calls easily Listening to recorded calls Need to back up call recordings Handling Incoming Calls Incoming call handling is focused around responsiveness The first step is to formulate a telephone management strategy which takes into account the following major criterion e What are your call volumes e Do your staffing levels reflect demand e Who answers your calls e How quickly are calls answered e How long does an average call take e Can you tailor your resources to adapt to varying demands e How long will callers wait for a call to be answered and why e Can you differentiate between callers Chapter 1 3 Welcome to MyCalls Generating basic information about call volumes MyCalls can gen
200. n 0 PBXs B g Head Office i Call Recording H P Agent Control B l Call Control B l Devices I Groups 45 Account Code Groups U DID Groups Extension Groups 8 Pilot Number Groups P Trunk Groups M Unavailable Codes ae se fe AE Epl The instructions of how to create a group are the same for extensions trunks account codes pilot numbers etc The following examples are with the use of extensions How To Creating a group 1 From the MyCalls Telephone System Configuration screen click Extension Groups 2 Click Create an Extension Group in the Extension Groups configuration area The Create a New Extension Group screen appears 3 Inthe dialog window that appears a number of fields are available for entry Some are mandatory fields whilst others are optional as outlined below FBX Code Head Office Name 4 PBX Code This field is filled with the assigned name of the PBX currently being configured Read Only 5 Name Enter a name to identify the Extension group for reporting on 6 Click OK Once the device group has been created you should add devices to it You can either open the group editing view and add new devices or you will need to edit existing devices in order to add them to your new group How To Adding an existing device to a group 1 From the MyCalls Telephone System Configuration screen click to expand Extensions 2 Click on
201. n about MyCalls It illustrates the use of the MyCalls application and then provides steps to customize the application to end user requirements WHO SHOULD READ THIS GUIDE This guide is for end users of a MyCalls installation used in conjunction with an NEC SV8100 NEC Aspire or NEC XN120 PBX to assist with application customization and management MyCalls Advanced Call Management System MyCalls Advanced Call Management System MyCalls Advanced Call Management System Contents Chapter 1 WELCOME TO IVY CALLS a cic toccnccvsysontosconsecsncacesaiedonrecssovenstenyeecssaresateteateorsonsnetantens 1 Key things that MyCalls will do for YOU cccccssscccceessececeesececceescceesueeececceneceeeeusecessuenecesseneceesegaeeetegs 2 What do need to configure first in the MyCalls application cccccccseseccceessececeesececeeseceesaeeeeeees 2 MVS OOO SCE aparece ts cena E E oes aeesene aetna 2 Handing Incoming senesne nent ie sete er meen nc en nne teen tn NE 3 Generating basic information about Call VOIUMES ccccceeccccccsseceeesececeeececeeeescceseeseeessegeceseeenes 4 GOIN CaS AOC asa cetecetesetircsciccsateacasaia testes TE EEEE 4 Adding flexibility With USES ccccsssccccccsseccccessceccseneeeceseeceeseusccessaseeesssauscessauecesssaeeesauaecessansses 4 Using DIDs to recognise purpose of CAIIS cccccccesscecccescceceesecccceeecceceeuseceeeeeceeeuaeceeeseneceesanseeetas 4 Managing calls
202. n alter the rate name period name minimum costs initial cost first and second charging periods and thereafter charging periods You can select whether the charges are fixed or not Rate Name Period Name Daytime sage Services and Personal Number Please note that all costs should be entered excluding any applicable taxes Minimum cost Initial cost 0 04200 0 00000 First Charging Period Charge 0 00000 Sings 00 00 00 forthefirst 00 00 00 Second Charging Period Charge 0 00000 Sia 00 00 00 forthenext 00 00 oo Thereatter Ps z ed Pear Charge 0 10700 Per 00 01 OO 8 Click OK Chapter 12 23 Agent Control Chapter 1 3 Agent Control Agent Control and Automatic Call Distribution ACD Agent Control allows you to manage which agents are made available to handle incoming calls from ACD queues within your organisation Agent Control and ACD will enable you to do the following e To ensure calls are distributed fairly so that no individual is overloaded whilst others are kept idle e Allow members of a lightly loaded department can assist a heavily loaded department on demand e Agents can be empowered to log onto call queues as necessary e Reasons and times when agents are unavailable can be recorded Users can be grouped together according to their primary skills and automatically logged on to the appropriate queues when required Because call volumes can vary enormously
203. n dialog 6 When you have located the layout file press the Open button to return to the Load Screen Layout window and then press the OK button to load the layout into the MyCalls window You can also delete public layouts if required This only affects the public layout and has no impact on any other layouts which may have used this public layout in the past How To Deleting a Public Layout from the Database You may delete a screen layout from the MyCalls database so that it can no longer be loaded by other users Users that have previously loaded a layout before it is deleted will not be affected 2 To remove a saved public layout from the MyCalls database select from the Layout Menu the option Delete Public 3 You will be displayed with the Delete Screen Layout window Layout Name E 4 From the Layout Name drop down list select the name of the saved layout you want to delete 5 Press OK to delete the layout from the database You will be prompted to confirm the deletion process to confirm press Yes or to cancel press No Agent Desktop users have very limited access to MyCalls features and have no control over the layout An Agent desktop will be assigned a layout by the supervisor and that layout will appear on screen as soon as the application is launched and the agent has logged in Chapter 4 4 Screen Layouts How To Assign a Public Layout to an Agent Desk
204. n for that call recorder Installed Call Recorders Name Edit Main Office Edit Add call recorder Delete call recorder Trunk Licensing Remaining Licenses Trunk Type Call Recorder Licensed 001 Digital Main Office Digital 26 002 Digital Main Office 005 Digital None Analog 8 006 Digital None IP 0 Chapter 7 3 Call Recording 4 From the call recording configuration page click Recording Rules essary Finally click the Test have been supplied The PBX Recording Server Name Recording Rules Download Speed KBits sec 50000 H Recording Backup UnitID Port Channel Trunk Type Test Connection 5 The Recording Rules dialog is displayed and you can define rules for enabling or disabling calls Extensions Selected Available Do not record the selected extensions Only record the selected extensions Callers Selected Available Do not record the selected callers Only record the selected callers Users Selected Available administrala Do not record the selected users Only record the selected users 6 Extensions DIDs Callers Trunks and Users can all be included or excluded from being recorded as required Selected Available Do not record the selected DIDs Only record the selected DIDs Trunks Selected Available Do not record the
205. n on a selected area click the mouse and drag across For example click the mouse at 6am and drag to 6pm 3 Ashaded area will appear over the selected area 00 00 06 00 12 00 18 00 00 00 Time Time 5 Repeat this until you have the desired selected area 6 To return to the original graph click the minus S icon on the bottom left side of the graph Click this several times Configuring Real Time Statistics windows Group statistics windows Chapter 6 5 Real Time Statistics You can view a wide variety of statistics for groups by configuring group statistics windows You will need to create a separate window for each type of group from DID Pilot Trunk and Extension groups depending on what you want to view Configuring the Group statistics window is the same in each case The device groups are arranged under the menu options e DID Groups e Pilot number groups e Trunk groups e Extension groups PEX Group a Ans Abd Out Int Gos Abd GOS Head Office AllAnalogPhons O O 0 O 000 0000 a l EE F l g 3 p m te _ aa ame aie pn E la it i a a a A E a E Individual statistics windows If you want to see statistics for individual devices or users these can also be configured You can view individual statistics for Extensions Users DIDs and Pilot numbers You will need to configure a different window for each category and the method of configuration is the same
206. n out of the window area Creation of individual device statistics window is a similar process to configuring a group window but How To Creating an Extension statistics window From the toolbar click View Select the option for Real Time Information or select the m icon from the main toolbar Expand the Real Time Statistics section and then expand the Extensions section Highlight the Extension Statistics option by clicking it and in the right side of the window click the task Create a New Statistics View The real time extension statistics configuration screen will be displayed Note in order for extensions to show up you need to enable real time statistics Chapter 6 10 Real Time Statistics FEX Display Values Head Office Historical Current Only Extensions Interval Pertod Ed 208 Fal Daily l w 237 RE 300 Refresh Time s EA 20 ay 60 302 Edit Title Font Edit Statistics Font 5 PBX If your MyCalls configuration is using more than one PBX then you can select between configured PBXs using the PBX drop down list 6 Extensions Select Extensions from the list of available devices in the Extensions list window If your extension does not appear here then it may need to be configured through telephone configuration 7 Display Values You can select to display either historic of current values If you choose historical then the intervals av
207. n switch between saved pages of a layout by using the drop down list of pages within the main toolbar Chapter 4 5 Screen Layouts Creating New Pages How To Creating new Pages From the layout menu select Pages and click the New option You will be prompted to provide a name for your new layout page Enter a name and click the OK button Layout Page Name ne Your new page will now have been created and now be displayed on screen The page will have been added to the layout page election tool in the main toolbar Bale 48 2 a 8 a lavo 4 You can now modify the page as per your requirements with real time window parameters Chapter 4 6 Screen Layouts Deleting Pages How To Delete Pages 1 Select a layout page you want to delete using the layout page selection tool on the main toolbar Layout Configure View Reports System User Installer Help Basie aseviaasabanr 2 From the layout menu select the Pages sub menu and then click Delete 3 You will be asked to confirm the deletion of the currently selected page Press Yes to confirm the deletion or No to cancel the process 4 The page will now have been deleted and removed from the layout page selection tool on the main toolbar Save All Pages How To Save all Pages If you have been making a number of modifications to different pages in your layout you can save the work you have done across al
208. n the Additional Cost column These will need to have been previously created through the Additional Costs under Fixed Costs 6 Click OK Chapter 12 6 Call Costing Handling Costs Handling Costs are costs that can be attributed to a call that are based on the labour costs involved in handling it It is also possible to add further handling costs for each account code DID or pilot number These handling costs allow calls taken on different account codes DIDs or pilot numbers to be charged differently which can be useful if you operate a bureau service for other companies and wish to charge your customers differently The labour costs involved with handling calls still apply to incoming calls as well as outgoing calls The handling costs can be configured to include incoming calls as well as outgoing calls This can be useful to do when you wish to see the how much it is actually costing you for your staff to take personal calls Editing User Costs User Costs are the labour costs involved when employing an individual user Each user can be configured to have an associated user cost Applying a user role of user or supervisor to most users would be very beneficial if user costs are defined as these roles do not allow users to view or edit the configuration and hence see the handling rates entered for each person How To Editing User costs 1 Select the Costs option from the Configure menu or clicking the i
209. nch Exchange PBX Private Branch Exchange PDA Personal Digital Assistant PRI Primary Rate Interface PSN Public Switched Network PSTN Public Switched Telephone Network QOS Quality of Service RNA Ring No Answer ROI Return on Investment SBR Skills Based Routing SL Service Level SLA Service Level Agreement UCD Uniform Call Distributor VoIP Voice over Internet Protocol VPN Virtual Private Network VRU Voice Response Unit WAN Wide Area Network Chapter 17 2 Acronyms amp Glossary Glossary Abandoned Call Inbound Also called a lost call The caller hangs up before reaching an agent Abandoned Grade of Service The percentage of calls that are abandoned after an acceptable amount of time Calls that are abandoned before the specified time are not considered A value of 97 is generally considered an adequate Abandoned Grade of Service Account Code Also known as Project Codes or Bill Back Codes Account Codes are additional digits dialled by the calling party that provide information about the call If all calls come into a central number then it is possible to enter an account code for each call to identify its purpose Reports can then be run on specific account codes or groups to isolate those calls from all the others Alarm Distribution List Identifies who the alarm notification should be sent to It is possible to specify email addresses computer names and processes to run Adherence to Schedule A general term that r
210. ndicate that the link between the PBX and the call processor has failed Setting this alarm to be active on an alarm schedule which covers only the working hours will mean that this alarm is not triggered in the middle of the night when there are likely to be no calls anyway Disk Space Monitoring A minimum amount Disk apace is required for correct operation of the operating system and the MyCalls database This alarm checks the current disk space available Monitor the PEX Please enter the maximum amount of time in minutes after which vou would like to be notified that there has been no data received 15 Minutes Please enter the minimum amount of free disk space in GB below which you would like to be notified GB Call Rate Alarms Call rate alarms are triggered if the number of calls is either lower than a specified value or higher than a specified value for the last hour The call rate alarms can be set up for both e Incoming calls e Abandoned calls e Overflowed calls e Outgoing calls An overflowed call on a Mitel PBX only is defined as a call that has been transferred between ACD Groups before being answered For other PBX types Overflow is defined as a call that has between ACD Queues Pilot Numbers before being answered The wizard allows you to set minimum and maximum calls per hour for Trunks Extensions DIDs Pilot Numbers Organisational groups You can specify all the device groups of a partic
211. ndoned Incoming e Abandoned Outgoing e Handled Chapter 14 39 Reporting e Held e Incoming e Incoming outgoing e Incoming conference e Incoming intraflow e Incoming network e Incoming overflow e Long calls e Long waits e Offered e Outgoing e Outgoing conference e Outgoing network e Picked up e Ring no answer e Short calls e Transfer count Ring Distributions Call count ring distributions provide a way of reporting how many calls were answered in specific time ranges e g how many calls were answered inside 6 10 seconds as opposed to 11 15 seconds There are two distributions Incoming ring times Calls which were answered Abandoned ring times Calls which were abandoned Custom Summary Reports Call Count Percentages Call count percentage values show how many calls rang up to a specific time and how many calls rang over a specific time You have a choice of Incoming calls and Abandoned calls e g how many calls rang for up to 20 seconds Call count percentage ring distributions split the call count percentages into time intervals as follows e Below 5 seconds e 5 10 seconds e 6 10 seconds e 11 15 seconds e And every 5 second interval up to 60 seconds e Over 60 seconds This allows analysis of the percentage of incoming and abandoned ring times falling into a given time interval Custom Summary Reports ACD Users A series of ACD related parameters Percentage values Total V
212. ndows Public Layouts and all the pages in the layout can be stored to a database or file and re used by any client alls Tun spenen Vrda an Que Head Office Abandones i j Calls Chapter 4 2 Screen Layouts How To Saving a public layout 1 You can save screen layouts as public layouts in either the MyCalls database or to an external file This means that other users can load it and use it as a starting point to create their own layout 2 When you have finished configuring your layout as you want it be viewed from the Layout menu select Save Public Save to database Layout Name Save to external file Layout Name Cancel You have two options for saving your layout You can either save it in the MyCalls database or you can choose a location on your computer or network and save it as a layout file lay file extension To save to the MyCalls database select the option Save to database and the Layout Name drop down list will become active Enter a new name for your layout to be identified by the system If you wish to overwrite an existing layout in your database then select an existing item name from the list To save your layout to an external file select the option Save to external file and the Layout Name field below will become active Enter a path into the field manually or click the Browse button to select a location to save your file to Enter a name for your file in the
213. ne is at the extension and ready to take calls Calls are then assigned to the logged in user rather than the default user This can be called hot desking where a person can change desks and still receive their calls Create Edit User logins and Pin Codes How To Creating a single new User Login From the MyCalls Telephone System Configuration screen click User Logins Pin Codes Click Create or Edit a User Login in the User Login configuration area The Edit User Login screen appears Click Add New User In the dialog window that appears a number of fields are available for entry Some are mandatory fields for successful setup whilst others are optional inputs as outlined below Login ID User None Select 5 Login ID Enter here the User Login ID entered at an extension by the user 6 User Assign a user to a User Login ID to enhance reporting so you can run reports on the user no matter what extension they are logged in at To select a user click the Select button to the right of the user field The Select User screen will appear Type part of a user name here Selected user 7 You can search for a user using the left field As you type in a name relevant matches will appear in the box below Once you have found your user select them in this box and click the Select button They will appear in the Selected User field If you wish to remove a select
214. ne system to make a logical link between a user and their current extension This means that when a queued call is to be routed the users associated with that queue can be correctly located Configure ACD queues Via the Pilot number configuration 4 Configure Unavailable codes Identifies a set of unavailable codes which can then be assigned to an agent control group Only available users can take calls therefore the ACD system needs to be aware if users are available or not at any time 5 Configure the Agent control Assign users and ACD queues to Agent control groups so that the users can be associated with a given queue or set of queues This allows a given user to automatically login to one or more queues 6 Configure a real time status window To view the queue status as described in the previous section Set up users Users are created within the MyCalls environment and you must be logged in as a user in order to run the MyCalls application Users can be given different roles and privileges within the application For more detailed information about users see the relevant section of this manual Dynamically associating a User with an extension In order for staff members to log into and out of ACD queues we must relate our staff members users with the extension that they are currently using Relating a user to an extension is accomplished via the login pin code configuration is also covered in the Device Configuration section in this m
215. neduaeseuaumeennnespe cane dtusuunetawnevedueserenseoeueateoneees 10 Chapter TO CALLERS uersa a E EE dguwesedsinesaianceseouseis 1 Mroduictionto Caller esn N ES 1 CREATING ANG editing CAI OMS corsa i catasc lick ties oii dea tical hah ave ueae vaste E eae eee 1 HOW TO Creating a Mew Caleb cugar aTe EEEE AEE teas idan tantsduceatenaieurenardbigeseeeaeedt 1 HOW TO ECITiING an exi tine Caller neinte a a a a a 2 Delene of a err N E ene Pee 3 How To Deletea single or a range of Callerssiicchiectthediele inti hive iene dee 3 IMPONE CES iria sa eee te case el anaes baa tac savcit wicsaha T E eds eee 3 Caler GOS sar sinc ssa ch cas sir din cis nesters ig wasabi aseent iva umes taal abacia namaste wanes tween ganic T N 3 System ond User GETING SfOUDS w c 2c3 25 455 4e cre ccpbateasentdiasesedecnaszaitecetnasiaeuae cag avtuniecsenttiasecedeceestaacdes 4 How To Creating a new Caller Grou Dcscstivscntd carseat ie E ete aes 4 How To Editing Caller group configuration sniessiitei icles ier ier Hie oaiee alee ede 4 How To Delete Caller group configuration ccceeccccessececeesececceeeceeceueecessuecessueeceeseneeeetanseeetas 5 How To View of Edit group membership vicscscccciessasccctisivecdessavcecssavessssasteavassavacesdavciedearacsbuseatabersanece 5 HOW TOLASsigning Callers CO as COU uniao a a a AAA 5 How To Removing a Caller from a SrOUP cccccccssscccecessececeesececeeeccceeeuseceseueceseuseceseeeeeceetanseeeeas 6 Deletinea Caller 9
216. ness 13 Chapter 8 TELEPHONE SYSTEM CONFIGURATION sscsscssccsccsscsccesccsscsscnscnscsscesscsscesees 1 CONTISUFATION ODUOMS cenre tics dacevuntcudeuehwantinescaatva thoes tutes aiten O 1 Accessing configuration OPTIONS USING THE MENU cccceescccccessecceceseccceeesececeeeeceeseeecceseusecesseeneses 2 COMISUPALION ESSCMUAIS arien tet wacal ease eid A 2 Accessing configuration options using toolbar SHOrtCUtS cccccceseccccesececenecscenseseeecesseneceeeneseeens 2 Whatta COMM BURG nao cssesicte esl choad to rsaniyh le aslurcusiubaianiuclt avis obotuebubseieia hie areuboe usa aliiala bono es 3 S O MyCalls Advanced Call Management System AULOMALIC Device CONTISUTATION sasincsiscieuasiaricn aaa a 4 General Conte uration Tasks for GEVICES cise we cscs ese eee dee eae ei ee 4 Ranges Orten oinen a ease Saat a a N cesses 5 How To Creating an item or range Of ITEMS esiereserini e a a aaa a aeia 5 Deleting aniten OF VAN GOVOR OMS aranna aa TE r ees 6 How To Deleting an item of a range of itemMS sseseessserrrsesrrrssrrrrssrrressrrrreserreserereserresrrereeserressne 6 PBX CONE Ura UON eanna E E E EN 7 Single PBX CONMSUATIONS caon N N esoe a hea tens 7 How TosAlter the PBX COMMPULAtlON arisera E seed anctuavdasedlesemecs 7 COUNTRY NUMOErNE Plasei a a 8 How To Creating Country Numbering PlanS ssossesssesesensssensseessrerssrersrersssrrssreesressseresrersseeeseerssees 8 Device Conna O Nne e NA 8 TYPES Or QE
217. ng Call Costing in MyCalls can seem quite daunting at first But in fact they can be as simple or as complex as you wish to make them It simply depends upon the needs of your organization The cost of a phone call can be broken down into four parts Actual cost telephony call cost fixed costs handling costs taxes In its simplest form the telephony call cost will be the only one used as the other parts are set to zero if they are not configured Profit margins can be added to each call and added to the actual cost of a call This profit margin can be expressed as either a fixed amount or as a percentage of the actual call cost For each call record the costs are broken down into three values call cost handling costs which include the fixed costs and profit Reports can then be run and filtered to show the information that matches any of the three value types Fixed Costs Fixed costs are costs that are allocated to capital expenditure items such as extensions and trunks Each type of extension and trunk can carry its own fixed cost In addition to the cost types an individual extension or trunk can be assigned an additional cost which can be used to cover any other costs that the type costs does not cover Fixed costs are not call dependant as the cost of running an extension or a standing charge on a trunk still applies whether there are any calls on that trunk or extension As such these do not appear on call detail type repo
218. ng Pilot Number Handling costs Select the Costs option from the Configure menu or click the icon on the toolbar Expand the Handling Costs category in the left pane of the window This will display all available PBXs in your enterprise Expand the PBX you want to configure the costs for Click Pilot Number Costs option Click Edit Pilot Number Handling Costs This window will list all pilot numbers along with their pilot name pilot type and their associated pilot number group as set through the telephone configuration or auto learned from the PBX In the Hourly Cost column you can assign per pilot number a pro rata hourly rate You can copy a value to multiple pilot numbers by right clicking the mouse button and copying then selecting and pasting onto the other pilot numbers Click OK Location Specific Costs Location Specific Costs are additional costs that are dependent on the location of the PBX where the outgoing calls will be made from These include the following e Local Area Codes e Carrier Associations e Profit Margins e Taxes Edit Local Area Codes Local Area Codes are the area codes that will incur a local rate call charge They are dependent on the location of the PBX and by default are governed by the area code entered for the PBX when it was Created The system will automatically assign the local area codes for you when the PBX is created If however these are incorrect
219. ng in which the supervisor or automated system records a sampling of calls The person conducting the monitoring then randomly selects calls for evaluation of agent performance Call Time Alarms Determines what the acceptable minimum and maximum average call times should be in a one hour period An average call time that is less than the minimum value can indicate that you may be rushing your calls An average call time that is more than the maximum value indicates that the calls are taking too long and you may need to speed up the conversation Caller Alarms Determines if a caller has been contacted within a specified time period Caller Tolerance How patient callers will be when they encounter queues or experience busy signals Caller Entered Digits CED Digits callers enter using their telephone keypads The ACD IVR or network can prompt for CEDs Calls in Queue A real time report that refers to the number of calls received by the ACD system but not yet connected to an agent Carrier A company that provides telecommunications circuits Carriers include both local telephone companies also called local exchange carriers LEC5 and long distance providers also called inter exchange carriers IXCs Circuit A transmission path between two points in a network Combination Values A real time display of a parameters shown together For example number of incoming outgoing and abandoned calls Computer Telephony Integration CT
220. nge as many callers as you wish before saving your changes Chapter 10 5 Callers 01606 Business ih Butiness nnnnnnmnnnnn CEETTEEE TOPO err POPP Senne cee eeeeeee CeCe eee nunnnnnnnnnn nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnmnn SOR Sone EEE TER 3 When you are happy with your callers selected groups press the OK button to save your changes How To Removing a Caller from a group 1 From the Callers Configuration screen click Create or Edit a Caller 2 On the Edit Callers window that is displayed you can either go to the Edit a Caller window to change the callers group to or you can do it here by using the Group column Select the option None to remove the caller from any previously selected groups You can change as many callers as you wish before saving your changes Number Alternate Number Name Type i 01666 mam MOH OO Business A 3 When you are happy with the changes you have made and want to save them press the OK button Deleting a Caller group How To Delete a Caller group configuration From the Caller Configuration screen click Caller Groups and select the group you want to Reception delete Click Delete Caller Group in the Caller Group configuration area You will be prompted to confirm deletion of the selected group Click OK Chapter 10 6 Alarms Chapter 1 1 Alarms Managing by exception using the MyCalls Alarm System We be
221. ns from the window then hold down the left mouse button on the column header you want to remove and drag the column out of the window area Chapter 6 11 Real Time Statistics single Value Windows Single Value windows are designed to display a statistic that is calculated in real time as each call is processed These values can either be displayed as a current value or as a range of values over a defined time period or interval such as number of calls answered in each hour Single value windows can only display information relating to a whole group of devices or users including account code groups DDI groups extension groups organization groups pilot number groups and trunk groups Real Time Status Real Time Statistics al Single Value Sim Account Code Groups o E Call Rate Eff Performance oe Avg Incoming Call Wait Time il Avg Abandoned Call Wait Time faa Avg Incoming Call Call Time ae Avg Outgoing Call Call Time fal Avg Intemal Call Call Time final No of Long Waiting Incoming C fl No of Long Waiting Abandoned ap No of Long Incoming Calls Eal No of Long Intemal Calls final Avg General Service Level final Avg Abandoned Service Level fa Service Level a P Abandoned Calls Service Level m i DID Groups Single Value windows quick reference table Account DID Groups Extension Organisation Pilot Code Groups Groups Number _ Pot ff Incoming Overflow Outgoing Interna
222. ntroduction to Layouts ecserin T E N es snus Gedo cee umiad sane sauaneeaubeseerGnctatngntaws 1 PUDIIC and Local Layouts s ccautiscnerdaicueeavecemeal accep todd eaeauatiaeae whacacdsecapmeas temtausauctew A 1 HOW TO SAVING aiOUDIIC VAY OUT isn soecce rien haaa a a a a 3 HOW TO Opening a Public LAYOUT eee ceescccceseccceseeccesceceescceeeeceseeeeeenceseeeceeseneceseaeeseusceseneceesens 3 How To Deleting a Public Layout from the Database ccccecccccsssseccccesecceeeeseceteeeseceeeeeceeseeeeeetes 4 How To Assign a Public Layout to an Agent Desktop USED cceccccssccecessceceeceeeseeeeenscesaneeeeeness 5 PAV OWL PACS aa a A ensue ialeceaa ata caua taasenerenen A 5 Creatine ING WP ae CS sanre a alee aaln parca baat aus ited Nei gacne pe T aaa tuensntaaeaeens 6 HOW To Creating new Pages ssssssessrssessesesrrsresessrseoseesesrrseosesressssroreserseosesresesrresosessesseseeseeresee 6 Deleting PICE Soie E 7 HOW TO Delete Papes penn et RRC oP a AE Ee 7 Save AlL PIBES araa NTE ene eee 7 HOw TOs SAV al Pa COS ina E E eam a siedisumave yanoeecastecn a auiaseawenoeaetecuoeamhaeedeomae tas 7 COTO NV PAPES nE A A E E 7 e MyCalls Advanced Call Management System HOW TO CODY PACOS sicncetokes acount nnceetoncttes conn rsatianacwaacaanielie S 7 REONE ee ast ara tessa ac ae ata etek Sat itt aa eh A ae 8 HOW To Reload Pag essnee sale ies Seat Gas Sos te Get see Garhi 8 View Screen as Agent Desktop USEF sist accictnoa
223. number the caller dialled One trunk group can have many 1 NIS numbers Fast Clear Down A caller who hangs up immediately after hearing a delay announcement First Call Resolution The percentage of calls that do not require any further contacts to address the customer s reason for calling The customer does not need to contact the call centre again to seek resolution nor does anyone within the organization need to follow up Forecasting The process of predicting call centre workload and other activities Gateway A server dedicated to providing access to a network Grade of Service GOS The probability that a call will not be connected to a system because all trunks are busy Grade of service is often expressed as p 01 meaning 1 percent of calls 11 be blocked Sometimes grade of service is used interchangeably with service level but the two terms have different meanings Handled Call A call that is received and handed by an agent or peripheral equipment Handling Time The time an agent spends in talk time and after call work handling a transaction Historical Report A report that tracks call centre and agent performance over a period of time Idle Time The time agents are available and waiting for calls Instant Messaging IM A type of text chat between two or more Internet users Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN A set of international standards for digital telephone transmission Interactive Voice Response IVR
224. ny MyCalls user can be enabled for call playback By default if no users are created in MyCalls you will be able to playback all calls Once users have been created then anyone logging into MyCalls as a user will have certain rights and restrictions dependent on their user type and where they appear within the organisational hierarchy The steps required to ensure call recording can take place for a given set of users are as follows e Create your users and user groups e Assign each user with a Role e Assign your users to their respective organisational groups e Assign each user a default extension e Assign each user a login pin if required e Enable the user for Call Recording e Configure any Call Recording rules The rules governing the playback of calls Any users that are created and want to play back calls must be enabled for call playback A normal User can listen to their calls only An Agent Desktop user can listen to their calls only A Wallboard user can not listen to any calls A Supervisor can listen to any calls within their organisational group and any sub group An ACD Supervisor can listen to any calls within their organisational group and any sub group A PBX Administrator can listen to any calls on their PBX An Enterprise administrator can listen to any calls on all PBXs The above rules can be overridden by applying call recording rules to Callers Users Extensions Trunks DIDs and call types Chapter 7 1 Call
225. ods and grade of service settings Reports to help with assessing your performance Group Summary reports show the total number of calls ring times durations long and short calls etc for any period and any device group Group Summary by Member reports will show overall Statistics but can break down the group statistics by the members of each group Call Detail reports will show a complete breakdown for each call and can be generated for all devices or limited to showing only certain groups of devices This gives a call by call breakdown of activity so you would tend to use this report to home in on specific problems or areas of interest If you want more detail you can generate custom reports which are available for group summaries and call details and offer over 120 individual parameters User Availability reports can show agent activity Agents can be in one of a number of states such as available DND wrap up etc Availability reports show the number of logins and duration of login time spent in wrap up unavailable or in DND with average durations for each state You can generate variations of this report which give a breakdown of unavailable codes Availability detail gives a breakdown of the states for each user and availability profile reports show the maximum and minimum number of users in each state for a specified interval such as every hour Performance reports give breakdown of service levels at both group detail and group summ
226. of Service for that specific device or group The Inc Overflow Ring setting is specified for groups of devices or users in the operational grade of service configuration and can vary between different groups Chapter 6 7 Real Time Statistics Overflow Number of connected overflowed calls Ring no answer Number of ring no answered calls Total calls Total number of incoming and outgoing calls relevant to the specific group or device Total duration Total duration of connected incoming and outgoing calls calculated for a specific group or device Total abandoned calls The number of calls where the caller terminated the call before being answered by a group for a defined period Chapter 6 8 Real Time Statistics Creating Grid View real time statistics windows Real time statistics windows can be configured to show groups of devices or individual devices In operation grouped devices are very useful as they show an overall set of values across several devices or users How To Creating a group statistics window for Extensions Groups 1 From the View menu select the option Real Time Information or select the icon from the main toolbar fall Real Time Status Sim Real Time Statistics o AEN DID Groups H fall Pilot Number Groups agm Trunk Groups E i Extension Groups E Extensions cere Users H Jmi DIDs E fat Pilot Numbers H single Value H Combination Values 2 Expand th
227. of users and associate them with a set of ACD queues and Unavailable Code groups A given user can only be a member of one Agent Control group but that group can be associated with several ACD queues An ACD Queue can be included in as many Agent control groups as required Chapter 13 10 Agent Control How To Creating an Agent Control group 1 From the Agent Control menu select Create or Edit an Agent Control Group 2 Either click Edit for a group you want to modify or click Add a new Agent Control group 3 Specify a name for the group 4 Select users to include in the group type part of the users name for the user s to appear in the available box and click Add to move the user to the included users box NB Any user can only belong to one Agent Control group you will get a warning message if the user already belongs to another group asking if you wish to move the user to this new group If you click Yes the user will be removed from the other group Edit Agent Control Group Configure an Agent Control Group An agent control group should be named help others understand its use The Users list should contain all the users who are to be controlled by this group The ACD Queues list should contain all the queues the users are allowed to log on to The queue should be marked as a primary login queue if itis one of the main queues thatthe user logs onto during their course of work The
228. oi V enana a a a NS 20 JUser Availabilty Detallarni E a E eines 21 Perormance SOILS tess acacia a a canes waa acaad oases aneaaaeas oraenawinaeiecamees 22 Grade Of Service Gl OUpsCe Calica ciececctsptisccesaees aieidactephichesetivaace A A TA 22 Grade Of service group SUMMER Y wast csssiaccisadecsucdvisee a E a 22 MyCalls Advanced Call Management System RESPONSE TIMES was aa a marine santa oaateee tesa etawnannimearele aaa 23 System REDONS polis case Ser anae Man cation ed va cycler E sa E sted ea sea case aNs oilers 23 Alarms Rab ed aea nateiacghio asa raten cabs tuctusesaccuaumscwaeaa ntanunetngacaana seni eatenassposuunens wimaeset nanan 23 Auto Confieured device Seinai A saieida bog ww dna bau uestiaoiwaduegtedesmean eeaaamawatwenioass 23 WEMA a ete To Oc ry ne ae 23 Unused orinirequentuly used devices nenen 24 Usage REDOM Seniai A A E A tne teat E E 25 D taill and Summary reports anna E EE S 25 How to Configure a call details or group summary Report s ssssseessseseseessseessresssrrssresseerssrereseesee 26 Reports involving time intervals and Profiles cccccccssseccccceseccccesececeesecceceeeeceeeeeeceesaeseceetauaeses 27 Call summary over SAME interval ccccccssecccsssccceeececenececenececeesceceencesaneceseuecesseneessenceseucessnecetsens 27 Call Summary Time Distribution REDOT noiae cores iis eee seas eee es Be eee 29 Call type SUIMMALY COM PallSON sn ainsi a ead isda podeu oleae eee reese noes 30 GrOUD
229. oltage signal to transmit information Analytics Advanced data analysis and reporting tools that enable the organisation to better understand customer trends and business activities Announcement A recorded verbal message played to callers Chapter 17 3 Acronyms amp Glossary Answered Call When referring to an agent group a call is answered when reaches an agent Auto Wrap Up An ACD feature whereby the ACD is programmed to automatically put agents into after call work after they finish talk time and disconnect calls When they have completed any after call work required they put themselves back into available Automated Greeting An agent s pre recorded greeting that plays automatically when a call arrives at his or her telephone station Automatic Call Distributor ACD A mechanism controlled by the PBX switch or call management software which can distribute calls among agents in an attempt to even out the distribution of calls to each agent Automatic Number Identification ANI A telephone network feature that passes the number of the phone the caller is using to the call centre in real time ANI is an American term Calling Line Identity CLI is an alternative term used elsewhere Availability The time the agent spends handling calls or waiting for calls to arrive Available State The work state of agents who are signed on to the ACD and are waiting for calls to arrive Average Call Value A measure common in r
230. on will be added to the list of devices if e The device does not currently exist e The device has not been manually deleted from the list The devices which can be automatically configured are Extensions DIDs Account Codes Trunks Pilot numbers Following an install of the system it may be advisable to allow a period of several hours whilst the system auto configures the most regularly used devices You can regularly check for devices which have been auto configured by running the system report Auto Configured Devices However don t rely on Auto Configuration create them upfront if possible 4 uia tip Automatic configuration of devices MyCalls will automatically add new devices to its list of configured items if they appear as a result of a call These devices will be added to the appropriate list of devices if the particular value does not already appear in the list For example any extension numbers which appear as a result of calls will be added to the extensions list If you delete a particular instance of a device from the list then it will not be added to the list in future This applies to all devices but the information for that device must also be available from the PBX switch For further details on which features are supported by your PBX switch please contact your switch maintainer All devices added due to auto configuration will have the type of unassigned and a created user of auto configura
231. onfigured differently for each Group of devices Grade of service settings allow you to specify when a Call has lasted too long or when the ring time was too long Minimum Configuration At the minimum you will need to configure Trunks Carry all calls to and from your organization and are the key mechanism employed by the application when recognizing calls Extensions These represent the physical telephones available in your organization Extensions come in a wide variety of types ranging from traditional analogue phones digital phones VoIP phones etc DID s If you use DID numbers within your organization you will need to configure them so that MyCalls is able identify and group calls to each DID or DID group Call recording If you are using call recording then you will need to configure your call recording settings before you can match your calls against their recordings Optional features Alarms You will need to configure the alarm conditions relevant to your organization dependent on what you want to monitor Agent Control Call control Account Codes Callers and Costing are also features that you may wish to configure once you have set up the basic system and properly configured and checked the essential items Chapter 8 3 Telephone System Configuration Automatic Device Configuration MyCalls will automatically configure devices as they become visible on the system If a call appears on an extension then that extensi
232. or as many account codes as you need to configure 7 Click OK to save all the changes you have made Configuring ACD environment devices Pilot Numbers Pilot Numbers are the numbers that are dialled to reach either an ACD queue or a hunt group These are usually internal numbers to the PBX and calls to these pilot numbers are usually transferred from an auto attendant or a DID Chapter 8 17 Telephone System Configuration Creating and Editing Pilot Numbers How To Creating a single Pilot Number 1 From the MyCalls Telephone System Configuration screen click Pilot Numbers 2 Click Create or Edit a Pilot Number in the Pilot Number configuration area The Edit Pilot Numbers screen appears 3 Click Add New Pilot Number 4 Inthe dialog window that appears a number of fields are available for entry Some are mandatory fields for successful setup whilst others are optional inputs as outlined below PBX Code Number Head Office Name Type Unassigned Pilot Number Group None Enable Real Time Statistics 5 Number Enter here the number of the pilot number you wish to create This must be a valid pilot number configured on your telephone system 6 Name Enter a name for your pilot number to identify its use If left blank the system will populate this field with the Number 7 Pilot Number Group You can select a pilot number group to group this pilot number under The value
233. orresponding phone numbers operating on a single PRI trunk The PBX knows which phone extension to ring because the DID tells the PBX which extension is associated with a given number Calls coming into DIDs can also be queued within the PBX This allows a basic call queuing facility but does not have the advantages of intelligent routing offered by ACD DIDs can be combined with ACD so that calls to a DID number are routed to an ACD queue For analysis purposes DIDs offer a number of benefits Organising your incoming calls by DID e g having a unique number for each type of enquiry will allow you to analyse caller activity based on the number dialled You can assign different response requirements to different DIDs based around department staffing or how long you believe a caller will wait How long a caller will wait is dependent on a number of factors such as purpose of call urgency of the call time of day time of year Clearly a call to an emergency doctor service will wait longer than a casual enquiry You can analyse call volumes across different times broken down into DIDs to give you a picture of your caller s patterns of behaviour and then tune your response and staffing accordingly Follow up unreturned calls It is inevitable you will miss some calls but MyCalls enables you to ask under what circumstances and examine why you are missing calls The most important issue however is when a call is missed are you able to return th
234. osts to be configured The billing system can operate worldwide and can handle most call types and costing scenarios Alarms MyCalls alarms manages the system so you don t have to It provides a huge range of alarm mechanisms for capturing and notifying almost any condition occurring within the system This can include call durations service levels toll fraud system failures and ACD events to name only a few Alarms can provide a real time notification or can be distributed via Email or FTP to remote locations Reporting Chapter 2 1 The MyCalls Software Suite MyCalls Reporting is amongst the most comprehensive in its class Reports ranging from call details and summary data time profiles trunk usage alarms audit events system problems departmental and organisational data can all be configured into regular reports All reports can be distributed to remote locations and can be scheduled to run at any time ACD MyCalls ACD and Agent control gives you complete control over the management of ACD queues It can show instant status of ACD activity on screen and you can control the login process remotely allowing supervisors to determine where and when an agent should be made available Add to this the integrated Unavailable Codes and the ability to group users into different Agent Control groups and queues and you have a comprehensive system for ACD Management Chapter 2 2 MyCalls User Environment Chapter 3 MyCall
235. ou to keep track of devices which are infrequently used Unused or infrequently used Devices Created On 24 10 2006 15 47 27 CoveringPeriod Since 01 06 2006 00 00 00 PBX Date Number Name Head Office DID Never 0514 DDI 514 Never 0576 DDI 576 Never 0566 DDI 588 Chapter 14 24 Reporting Usage Reports Detail and Summary reports Call detail and Group summary reports produce individual detailed statistics or cumulative statistics for calls over a defined reporting period The standard reports can be grouped and filtered to give whatever calls or subsets of calls you require Call Detail reports give a breakdown of individual calls grouped by device or user and filtered as required Total Time OfCall User Call Type Duration Tir Caller Name 2471 01 08 2008 07 04 37 None Inc 00 00 10 Heathrow Dep 01 08 2006 07 20 31 Mone Out 00 02 14 01 06 2000 09 14 06 None Out 00 00 03 01 08 2006 09 15 59 None Out Abd 00 00 00 01 08 2006 09 18 11 None Out Abd 00 00 00 Group Summary reports show cumulative information on device groups or user groups by call type and filtered as required Group Summary Created On 26 11 2008 14 16 53 Covering Period 07 06 2006 00 00 00 to 15 08 2008 23 59 59 Report Filtered To show summaries for the device type Extension Transferred calls are being reported as a multiple calls Number of Calls Average Duration Average Ring Time Num Long short Group Ans Abd Out Tir Ans Out Ans Abd Waits Call
236. oup that handled the call or the trunk group All the device types can be used to provide very detailed filtering The results can then be ordered by the total length of calls for that number the call cost for that number or the call handling cost for that number e Summary All Calls Provides a summary of the volumes and handling times of different call types for any given type of device e Summary All Calls by Costing Type Provides a summary of the volumes and handling times of different call types for any given type of device e Summary All Calls by Extension Provides a summary of the volumes and handling times of different call types for all the members of a group for any given type of device e Summary All Calls by Trunk Provides a summary of the volumes and handling times of different call types for all the members of a group for any given type of device Daily Reports e List All Calls Provides a list of detailed calls that are grouped by a specified device type such as extension or account codes The report can be further filtered so it only applies to a certain range of devices such as a specific extension group or organization group e List All Calls by Telephone Number e List All Calls to Voice Mail Chapter 14 8 Reporting e List All Outgoing Calls e List Calls to International Numbers e List Calls to Mobile Numbers e List Calls to Special Numbers Premium e List Calls Under 1 Minute Long e List Call
237. ously monitor the system themselves The next step Once you have your call data you will be able to see how various aspects of your organisation are performing and you can use this data to refine and reformulate your strategy and fine tune up your operating parameters The first thing then is to measure your call volumes and see how well you are handling your calls Chapter 1 5 Welcome to MyCalls Measuring current call volumes When you first install MyCalls you will want to be able to use the data gathered to help quantify your current call volumes Fortunately you do not need to do anything special to enable you to run meaningful reports The following examples refer to running of reports and display of real time statistics screens The details of how these reports and screens are configured are covered in the relevant sections but this detailed knowledge is not required in order to follow these examples To make a useful forecast of call volumes you will need to know Total number of calls in a given period say 1 month This can be derived from a summary of all calls report If we run the report for incoming calls on all trunks and ensure that any transferred calls are consolidated into single calls we can see the total number of incoming calls for the reporting period along with other useful data such as average duration of calls and average ring times normally a call which is connected and then transferred to another extens
238. ow To remove a real time window from your layout page Press the in the top right of the window and it will be deleted Chapter 6 16 Real Time Statistics How To Configuring an existing Real Time window To change the configuration settings of a real time window right click over the selected window with your mouse and select the Configure option from the menu that appears near your cursor You will then be presented with the configuration screen for that type of window and can amend the configuration settings to your requirements FEX Group Head Office All Trunks kata ery om mi Show Summary ee ee Eonia Visibility W Show Title Show Calls In Queue Label enrol J Show Calls In Queue Value Lv Show Trunk Show Longest Wait Label L ie rm L p Show Longest Wait Value W Show Usage 5 3 Press OK to apply the changes and view the newly configured window 4 Pressing the cancel button at any time will abort the changes and revert back to the existing settings Chapter 6 17 Call Recording Chapter Call Recording The MyCalls system provides access to call recordings using the Calls list on the front screen From the calls list you can see at a glance any calls which have been recorded and you can playback these calls on the desktop simply by clicking the call playback icon see below Enabling Users for Call Playback A
239. ow To Creating a group statistics window for Extensions GrOouPS cccccceeescccseseceeececeeeceeenesss 9 How To Creating an Extension statistics WINGOW ccccccsseccccssecceesceceeececeeceeseneeeeesceseuecessneeetes 10 eT MyCalls Advanced Call Management System SIMIC Value WY IGOWS nesunan a inane N 12 How To Creating a single value WINKOW c csscccssscceceseceeeneccceseeceenceeceueceeeneeeseeesseuecessneceneneeees 15 Combination Valte VWINGOWS esere easiest tei aaa Go cau anand suman a conpnaaseaursammnauieaanancneadioneas 15 How To Creating Combination Value Real Time Parameter WINGOWS cccccsecesseseeseseeeeeeeneees 16 REMOVINE a Real Time WING OW scsi esevecovszcdavaccesavaccddeacoeveeccdnwecdadidvocenc aah r EE E weenie Wea ted darted eee 16 How To Configuring an existing Real Time window cccccsssecceccsecceeesececeesecececeeeceesenseeetseneces 17 Chapter 7 CALL RECORDING aiicascscrisetiuncacscuscccssnniesieaicedscanesastameccssenesecieeimedeaarcsausiesaianconenatess 1 Enabling Users Tor Gall Play GaCkiieccsahuterssaasacusasete atte A E A 1 The rules governing the playback OF Calls eenaa aa ee eine a aa ees 1 How to Enable a User for playOd CK vcaisiniiccesiatieadrnssdasnirvasweadinnsecdtevurcites ace viet iaedtedorasebeaiaaetiweseeeeaseank 2 Restricting Call PlAVOAC Gicusae sits soaercsteamacnilusts calenccerucany e AAE 3 How To Configure Call Recording Rules cccccccssececccesecec
240. p By giving the unavailable code group a recognisable name you can help others understand its meaning Unavailable Code groups are used to restrict the unavailable codes that users can emply during their course of work PBX Code Head Office Name Sales Supervisors 4 Click OK 5 The new group will be added to the Unavailable Code menu 2 Configure Telephone System i PBXs e K Head Office oe Call Recording re Agent Control aoe R Agent Control 44 gt Unavailable Code Groups sae 1 Sales Agents mee Sales Supervisors Chapter 13 9 Agent Control Select the newly created group and select Edit Unavailable Code Group configuration From the list of Unavailable Codes select the ones to include in your group by clicking the appropriate Included checkbox The codes selected will be the only codes a user allocated to this Unavailable Codes group can choose from Edit Group Membership P ime Edit the Group Membership Check the unavailable codes that should be members of this group a column header here to group by that column Name Short Name Included Refreshment RT T Natural Break MB Smoking SG Meal ML Meeting MG Email Handling EH N N SOO s Web Handling 8 Click OK Creating Agent Control Groups Associating users with ACD queues is accomplished via the Agent Control group configuration We create an Agent Control group to identify a group
241. p them from the organization structure to the group From the Organisational Configuration screen select the user you want to assign to a group and drag across to the group and release the left mouse button You can also use the Edit User Configuration window to change the organisation group Mame Abbreviation Job Title John Sales manager Group Path Group iiai F User Role Organisation Sales iiine m PEX Administrator Office admin Password Organisation lt Last Modified By sales TKELMARSOFTWARE mimine Email Address Creation Date Last Modified Date 06 10 2008 15 41 58 16 10 2008 11 40 00 E Enable Real Time Statistics J Enable Call Playback 4 When you are happy with your users selected groups click OK to save your changes Chapter 9 8 Organisation and Users How To Removing a User from a group 1 The easiest method to remove a user from a group is to drag them from the group they are in and drop them in another group in the organizational hierarchy Simply select the user by hovering over them and clicking the left button on the mouse drag them over to the group you want to move them to and release the left mouse button 2 For example move John from office admin into sales wa Organisation ay Organisation a Office admin c Office admin es o he A ma ae a max Serr i fi Sales bm A John he A administrator HAA administrator 3 Ifyou want to remove the user from
242. pe of window allows you to view many statistics in the minimum screen area You can configure group or individual statistics grid views Extension Group Statistics E Drag a column header here to group by that column Day Column Chooser PEX Group Ans Abd Out lint Gos Abd Gos Head Office All Analog Phones 0 D 0 0 0 00 0 00 Head Office All Announcement F 0 0 0 0 0 00 0 00 Head Office All Auto Attendant D D 0 0 0 00 0 00 Real time statistics displayed in the grid view allows you to display cumulative call statistics on users DIDs extensions pilot numbers DID groups extension groups pilot number groups and trunk groups Statistics included by default include answered calls abandoned calls grade of service and abandoned grade of service although more fields are available to be added to the view if required Daily Hourly Single Value windows Single value windows provide numeric or graphical windows showing single value statistics based around Call Rate and Performance Call Rate windows display numerical values only whereas performance statistics can display results as numerical values or graphical values To show these parameters as a numerical value select the Show Single Value in the configuration window PBX Display Values Head Office Historical Current Only Interval Period Group Daily SUGESaiees Refresh Time 5 Title Ava Inc Wait Time Visibility Show Title W Show Group 7
243. pter 14 20 Reporting User Availability Detail This report provides a more detailed chronological report of the various states of availability on a per user basis User Availability Detail Created On 2410 2008 15 05 21 Covering Period 01 06 2008 00 00 00 to 02 08 2006 23 59 59 Report Filtered To Only include organisation groups Organisation Time Type Extension Pilot Name Code Duration 2910 Dave Simmons 01 08 2008 10 05 41 Logged On 2910 General Sales 06 33 58 01 08 2008 10 39 50 In Wrapup 2910 00 00 16 01 08 2008 10 40 06 Out Wrapup 2910 01 08 2008 11 45 35 In Wrapup 2910 00 00 15 01 08 2008 11 45 50 Out Wrapup 2910 01 08 2008 12 08 58 In Wrapup 2910 00 00 16 01 08 2008 12 09 14 Out Wrapup 2910 01 08 2008 16 39 39 Logged Off 2910 General Sales 31 20 21 This report shows a profile of various availability states at defined time intervals Time intervals can be set to multiples of the following e Minute e Hour e Day e Week The example screenshot has a reporting period limited to the hours of 09 00 18 00 with a time interval of 1 hour If the reporting period was set to the whole 24 hours then the out of hours results 16 00 09 00 would show zeroes which would be unnecessary for the report User Availability Profile Created On 24 10 2008 15 16 57 Covering Period 01 08 2008 09 00 00 to 02 08 2008 17 59 59 Report Filtered To Only include organisation groups Organisation Number of Calls Logged
244. queues and extensions not in use Statistics windows View current and historical data View single values such as incoming or outgoing call counts abandoned call rates group activity and statistics specifically tailored to your business model Call logs Alarm logs and lists of unreturned calls all help you manage daily workloads Chapter 1 1 Welcome to MyCalls Key things that MyCalls will do for you Traffic Analysis MyCalls can help you monitor your telephone system s traffic Traffic reports can show if you have too many trunks paying for rarely used extra phone lines or not enough trunks current phone lines are busy most of the day These reports can also show you which calls were routed over particular trunks By monitoring your phone system s call routing ability you can be certain the correct calls are being routed to the least expensive trunk Reporting You can generate the information you need when you need it For example What is the most frequently dialled long distance telephone number How much money does your company spend making Premium Rate calls How many times did your sales department call clients London last week Which calls were more than 30 minutes long Toll Fraud Alarms MyCalls can provide you with a means of detecting toll fraud There are numerous forms of toll fraud Some of the most common forms of toll fraud include e Hackers calling in on one trunk and accessing an outside phone line e Ex
245. r a network path where a file containing the report may be stored Specify which email addresses the reports will be sent to click Next 8 Click Finish Saving to file is run on the server Setting up the file path must be local to that server It is recommended that this be configured on the server itself When saving to a file if the file exists then the date file is created appended to the filename Chapter 14 43 Reporting Scheduling Reports Report Schedules are the means by which a set of report items can be configured to be run automatically and sent to various destinations at a certain time Note that you must have configured at least one Report Distribution List before you can configure any report schedules How to Creating scheduled Reports 1 Select the Reports option from the configure menu or click the 3 icon on the toolbar 4 Report Distribution Lists lr Report Templates 5 Report tems Seay Repot Schedules 2 Select Report Schedules 3 Click Create a Report Schedule 4 Inthe box that appears enter a name and click Next Schedule Task Start Time e 31 01 2006 00 00 00 Aa Schedule Task Daily Every day s 5 In the next window you can schedule how often a task occurs from the drop down menu e g once hourly you can alter the start time and alter how many days to schedule the task 6 Click Next 7 Select the report items to include by se
246. r a name and click save Recordings which you cannot listen to Calls that show a speaker icon crossed out means the calls has been excluded from call recording in the recording rules configuration 20 70 2008 00 00 Chapter 7 8 Call Recording Call Recording Configuration Trunk Configuration Configuration of call recording requires the correct configuration and licensing of trunks Whilst this should be taken care of during the system installation it is possible that the call recording configuration could change at some point due to licensing of additional trunks In order to enable recording on specific trunks they will need to be assigned as call recording trunks within the call recording configuration Access to the Call Recording configuration How to Access the Call Recording configuration screen 1 From the menu select Configure gt Telephone system gt PBX gt Call Recording Elf PBXs B E Head Office i Call Recording i f Agent Control El I Call Control Devices F Groups 2 Select the Edit Call Recorder Configuration 3 The Edit Call recorders window will be displayed Edit Call Recorders Edit Call Recorders To edit an individual call recorder click the edit button for that call recorder Installed Call Recorders Name Main Office Add call recorder Delete call recorder Trunk Licensing afin Remaining Licenses Type Call Recorder
247. r separate taxes can be defined and are added together and applied to all calls How To Editing Taxes 1 Select the Costs option from the Configure menu or click the icon on the toolbar 2 Expand the Location Specific category in the left pane of the window This will display all available PBXs in your enterprise Expand the PBX you want to configure the costs for 3 Click the Taxes option 4 Click Edit Taxes Description Rate 75 VAT 17 50 2 0 00 J 0 00 4 0 00 5 This window will give you four entries to define four separate taxes You can provide a description for each tax entry and also the rate of taxation as a percentage 6 Click OK Carriers Carriers are also known as operators and are the telephone companies that provide the telephone service to your company It is possible to have multiple carriers supply a single company Each carrier is responsible for connecting one or more types of calls It is quite common to have one carrier supply your local calls and another that supplies your national calls If when you make a call you do not prefix the number you are dialling with another series of digits then you will be using Carrier Pre Select where the carrier is set for that type of call at the exchange If you prefix the number you are dialling with another series of digits then you will most likely be using Least Cost Routing It is possible to have several Least Cost Routing
248. r the current hour of the day If current Chapter 6 9 Real Time Statistics only is selected then the intervals available are Last hour and this is rolling time period for the previous 60 minutes from the current time 6 Interval Period After selecting the display values in instruction 6 choose the interval period from the interval period drop down list 7 Refresh Time You can set the refresh time for when you want the statistics in the window to refresh By default this is set to 60 seconds 8 You can change the style of the title and statistics fonts for the window by using either the Edit Title Font button or Edit Status Font button and configuring the various style options 9 When you have completed the configuration of your windows settings then press the OK button and your window will be placed on the currently selected layouts page Press cancel at any time to abort the setup Extension Group Statistics Eq Drag a column header here to group by that column Day Column Chooser PEX Group Ans Abd Out Int GOS Abd GOS Head Office All Analog Phones 0 0 0 0 0 0O 0 00 Head Office All Announcement P 0 0 0 0 0 00 0 00 Head Office All Auto Attendant 0 0 0 0 0 00 0 100 10 Once the window is created you can add additional columns to what is setup using the Column Chooser If you want to remove any columns from the window then hold down the left mouse button on the column header you want to remove and drag the colum
249. rd report template for that type of report There are custom reports available for the following template types e Custom Call Details e Custom Group Summary e Custom Group Summary for each member e Custom Group Summary Profile Where a custom report differs is in the choice of fields which can be shown Chapter 14 35 Reporting How To Setup a Custom Report 1 Create a report item based on the custom report template required 2 Configure the reporting period 3 Configure the Device Groups and devices 4 Configure the unavailable codes if required The example screen shows the configuration for the Group Summary custom report Device Type Tonk E Groups Select up to 10 unavailable codes E All Analog Trunks F Email Handling E Al ISON Trunks E Al Private Wires F All Q Sig Trunks E All TCP IP Trunks FJ All Trunks E Unassigned Trunks Include sub groups of selected groups Included Information Available Information 5 Click on the Available information button and Specify your custom fields using the menus and submenus click on the required fields to add them to the report Call Durations Costs j Call Counts ti TA Re Users Incoming Ring Distribution Abandoned Outgoing Performance Abandoned Ring Distribution Answered Incoming Ring Up To Incoming Incoming Ring Ower Long Calls Abandoned Ring Up To Long Waits Abandoned Ring Over
250. re 3 included Extensions The detailed filter screens are similar in operation You choose which groups of device to include in the report and or individual devices to include in the report So in the example above you could include a complete group or a single extension Any items not included in the filter are excluded from the report Chapter 14 18 Reporting Deleted devices The option to include deleted devices enables correct reporting of historical data In the event that a report is required for some period in the past and devices had been deleted since then Including an individual device With reference to the screenshot above type a part of the extension you wish to include until you can locate the extension s required from the individual extension list Select the extension s required and click the Add button The extensions to be included in the report will appear in the right hand Included Extensions box Click the remove button to remove the extensions if they are not required Specifying Call types to include in a report Many of the report templates allow you to specify call types for inclusion in the reports This means you can analyse only incoming call types or only outgoing call types or even down to specific types of call such as incoming abandoned outgoing transferred etc For more detail on available call types see the detailed list in Appendix A You can select the call types from the list of C
251. reen as they are positioned To come out of the Agent Desktop view in order to move and re size real time windows you can select the Restore from Agent Desktop view from the Pages sub menu of the Layout menu Resetting Installation Defaults How To Reset to installation defaults If for whatever reason you have got to the point where you wish you could start over again you can From the Layout menu select the option Reset to Installation Default and this will reset all your layouts and pages back to how they were when the application was first installed Chapter 4 8 Real Time Status Chapter 5 Real Time Status What are Real Time Windows A real time window is an on screen display of a value that is calculated there and then from information collected from the PBX These windows can be used to display information on the following single and group items Single Items Groups DIDs Trunk Groups Extensions DID Groups Pilot Numbers Extension Groups Users Pilot Number Groups Account Code Groups Organization Groups There are four types of real time windows you can create to display call information Real Time Status Windows Real Time Statistics Windows Single Value windows and Combination Value Windows How To Accessing Real Time windows To access real time windows 1 Onthe main MyCalls screen click View gt Real time information 2 This presents you with the following men
252. ring of call queues and agents in real time Real time status and statistics MyCalls provides a range of real time status screens which allow agents and supervisors to see what the current state of the phone system is This can tell you information such as who is currently busy Chapter 1 4 Welcome to MyCalls on calls how long calls have lasted who is logged on etc You can also see queue status for DIDs and ACD queues i e how many calls are in queue and longest wait in queue etc This kind of information gives an immediate snapshot of the system but for more meaningful information you will want to see statistics for the current hour or day or an hourly breakdown of the various performance parameters and call rates over the last 24 hour period This is provided by a variety of real time statistics screens which can take the form of single value windows showing for example the number of abandoned calls today or bar graph representations of the number of calls per hour These statistics can be viewed either as individual statistics such as a specific extension or can look at the statistics for one or several groups of devices users or queues Developing your strategy using Reporting Real time information is great for immediate day to day management but to develop a successful call management strategy you need to have much more comprehensive historical information available MyCalls reporting gives you a library of reports rang
253. rmation This is especially useful if for example you want to create a grouped view of departmental statistics Other elements of a layout which you can customize are the toolbars displayed on screen You can choose to hide or display the main toolbar grid or status bars The MyCalls window can be repositioned on your desktop and resized so that the next time you open the application it recalls these settings and positions itself accordingly Layout Configure View Reports System User Help Boana o 7 Call Volume Chart Incoming Calls Outgoing Calls All Trunks Head Office All Trunks Head Office 12 00 Time HE Outgoing MEM Abandoned MEM Incoming Public and Local Layouts Local layouts are views that you create on your local machine They viewed only on the computer on which they were created Chapter 4 1 Screen Layouts To share your layout with other users you need to save it as public in a location accessible by other users in the MyCalls database Should you wish to share the layout with users on other sites or create a layout for general distribution then you can save the layout to a disk file Agent Desktop users Cannot open public Layouts or create their own layouts as they have a layout pre assigned to them Layouts and Pages Page 2 layout Layout Pages Layouts are created locally Deo li age 1 layout and can consist of several g y pages each with a different arrangement of wi
254. rrier Rates option under the carrier you want to configure the settings for Click Add or Edit Carrier Rates Name Period Initial Cost Min Cost Thereafter Cost Thereafter Rate Thereafter Interval c Callsto Daytime 06 0000 0 0420 01070 e Calisto Evening 0 0000 020 0 0620 e Calls to Morning 0 0000 0 0420 0 0620 c Callsto Weekend 00000 0 0420 0 0327 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 7 ih d Calls to Daytime 0 0000 0 0420 0 1422 d Calls to Evening 0 0000 0 0420 0088 d Calls to Morning 0 0000 0020 0 0838 d Calls to Weekend 0 0000 0 0420 0 0838 dint Chore Chet PLA O Tia 0 7178 4 To add click Add and enter a name for the carrier rate SRS HGS RSS SCS RSS 5 To Import click Import and select the file you wish to import 6 Click OK Chapter 12 21 Call Costing How To Delete a Carrier Rate 1 Select the Costs option from the Configure menu or click the icon on the toolbar 2 Expand the Carriers option and select the carrier name of the configuration you want to delete 3 Select the Carrier Rates option under the carrier you want to configure the settings for u Click Delete Carrier Rates B Calls to Message 5 Services and Personal Ee as to Personal Numbering Senices Directory Enquiries m0 asses enon T e 4 fant Directory Sanaa pikaldi dq14 Directory Enq
255. rts Editing Fixed Trunk Type Costs Trunk types can be assigned a fixed cost The amount entered can be specified as an amount for a period defined as hourly daily weekly monthly quarterly or yearly The fixed cost amount will always apply regardless of whether or not the trunk received or made any calls and will be shown on reports as a pro rata figure Chapter 12 1 Call Costing 2 Elf PBXs 5 6 Head Office gg Trunk Type Costs Handling Costs Location Specific Camer How To Editing fixed Trunk type costs 1 Select the Costs option from the Configure menu or click the icon on the toolbar 2 Expand the Fixed Costs category in the left pane of the window This will display all available PBXs in your enterprise Then expand the PBX you want to configure costs for 3 Select the Trunk Type Costs option Fixed Costs a PBXs bal F Head Office 4 Click Edit Fixed Trunk Type Costs Type Cost E Cost Period Anal 0 00 Quarterly ISDN 60 00 Quarterly Pavaewie 000 Holy i TCP IP 0 00 Weekly Unassigned 0 00 Monthly Yearly 5 You can configure the costs for the different trunk types configured on the system including Analogue ISDN Private Wire TCP IP and any unassigned trunks To configure a cost for a trunk type enter a costing value in the Cost column and then select one of the costing periods from the Cost Period column Periods selectable
256. runk configuration area The Edit Trunk screen appears Click Add New Trunk In the dialogue window that appears a number of fields are available for entry Some are mandatory fields for successful setup whilst others are optional inputs as outlined below FEX Code Number Head Office Name Type Unassigned Trunk Group Alternate Carrier Mone None Number Enter here the trunk number you wish to create This must be a valid trunk configured on your telephone system Name Enter a name for your trunk to identify its use If left blank the system will populate this field with the number Trunk Group You can select a trunk group to group this trunk number under The values in this list are configurable under Trunk Groups The default value is set as none Type Select a trunk type from the drop down menu 9 Alternate Carrier An alternate carrier can be assigned to a trunk This means that calls made on this trunk can have different costings applied to the standard one 10 Click OK Creating a range of Trunks How To Creating a range of Trunks From the MyCalls Telephone System Configuration screen click Trunks Click Create a Range Trunks in the Trunk Configuration area In the dialogue window that appears a number of fields are available for entry Some are mandatory fields for successful setup whilst others are optional inputs FEX Code Number of Trunks Head Office 1 S
257. rver specified Chapter 8 29 Telephone System Configuration Grade of service and Grace periods What is Grade of Service GOS You may specify the limits after which a call is treated as having rung or lasted too long You can also configure the relative importance of these limits Note that overflowed calls are regarded as incoming calls for the purposes of Grade of Service General Grade of Service is used to measure the percentage of calls which were answered within the target ring time for that department or group compared with the total number of answered calls for that department or group The total number of calls can include long wait calls where the ring time extends beyond the target ring time configured Long Waits number of answered calls which rang for longer than the target maximum ring time l Incoming connected calls long waits General Service level ____LL _ 100 Incoming connected calls Abandoned Grade of Service measures the percentage of calls which were answered within the target ring time for that department or group compared the total answered calls plus the long abandoned calls Long abandoned calls are those calls which were abandoned after the minimum abandonment time i e genuine abandoned calls Incoming connected calls long waits Abandoned Service level 100 Incoming connected calls Long Abandoned calls Service levels can be displa
258. s option from the Configure menu or click the icon on the toolbar 2 Select the Carriers option 3 Click Import Carrier in the right pane Name Browse Cancel You will be presented with a screen that allows you to browse to the carrier configuration file saved in a location on the local computer or a network location If the carrier details in the file already exist the carrier in MyCalls will be updated otherwise a new carrier will be created and listed under the Carriers area of the Configure Costs window Click OK Edit an Existing Carrier You can use the edit carrier wizard to modify the country the carrier is in and the least cost routing digits the carrier uses Chapter 12 17 Call Costing How To Editing an existing Carrier 1 Select the Costs option from the Configure menu or click the icon on the toolbar 2 Click Carriers 3 Select the carrier you wish to edit e g BT Business Feed Costs lt Handling Costs lt Location Specific BT Carers gg Costing Periods a Camier Rates Special Numbers 2 Mobile Numbers 2 Intemational Numbers 4 Click Edit Carrier in the right pane Name BT Business Country Least Cost Routing Digits United Kingdom l 18866 75143 You can change the name modify the country the carrier is in and modify the least cost routing digits the carrier uses You can enter multiple sets of least cost routing digits
259. s DID filters etc can also be applied Quick Search Filtering Set the grid filtering by Number DID Extension Call type Date Time Results must meet all criteria in the filter so be careful not to leave anything in the Number box if you are only searching for calls related to an Extension as any calls returned in the grid would need to match both number and extension Chapter 3 6 MyCalls User Environment Custom e 13 071 2008 00 00 MN 12 10 2008 23 59 E Mel CU Max Rows limits the number of rows viewable in the grid up to a maximum of 500 It is recommended that this is kept to a maximum of 50 calls for normal operation to limit the loading on the database Refresh allows you to manually refresh the calls in the view Chapter 3 7 Screen Layouts Chapter 4 Screen Layouts Introduction to Layouts Layouts are the view of MyCalls that you see when you run the application A layout is made up of pages A page contains a particular arrangement of parameter windows and can be stored under a specific page name as part of a layout Changes to the arrangement of a given page is automatically stored and recalled when the application is closed and reopened Layouts along with their pages can be saved as public layouts Pages are normally arranged so that parameter windows relating to a particular set of information can be grouped and viewed together without the screen becoming overburdened with unnecessary info
260. s Calls Head Office DESPATCH 0 20 0 0 0 00 00 0 00 00 00 0000 00 0002 0 0 19 E COMMERCE 6 1 31 2 0010 28 0003 54 00 0003 00 00 44 0 0 a FINANCE 34 0 42 d1 00 01 17 00 02 24 00 0007 00 00 00 0 0 5 IT DEPT 0 0 0 0 0000 00 0 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 0 0 0 MARKETING TS 12 49 68 0001 37 O02207 00 0007 00 00 25 0 0 10 OPERATIONS 454 6 T2 110 00 01 56 00 01 06 00 00 15 000002 0 0 30 PRODUCT 251 1 117 17 0 03 06 00 11 41 O62 00 22 00 00 01 0 0 26 Chapter 14 25 Reporting Group Summary by Member shows cumulative call information for each member of a group or groups and filtered as required Group Summary for each Member Created On 26 11 2008 14 21 24 Covering Period 01 08 2008 00 00 00 to 10 08 2008 23 59 59 Report Filtered To Show summaries for the device type Extension Transferred calls are being reported as a multiple calls Number of Calls Average Duration Average RingTime Num Long short Cost Group Ans Abd Out If Ans Out Ans Abd Waits Calls Calis Call Taxes Fixet Head Office DESPATCH 2553 0 1 4 0 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 0 0 0 00 0 00 0 00 26 0 0 D 0 0 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 0 0 D 0 00 0 00 0 1000 Totals 0 1 0 0 0 0 d 0 00 0 00 0 00 E COMMERCE 2678 3 1 18 1 00 06 51 00 04 48 00 00 03 00 00 44 0 0 T 5 62 0 00 0 00 Totals 3 1 18 1 0 0 T 5 62 F 0 00 0 00 How to Configure a call details or group summary Report Select the report item or template Configure the reporting period Conf
261. s User Environment Logging into the system Before you can use MyCalls you need to log in to the system Initially you will not have configured any users therefore you will be able to start up the system without a user login so you can start with a blank login by just clicking OK until users have been configured Logging into the system as a user requires that users with appropriate user types and passwords have been set up during the configuration of the application For more details on this see the Organisation settings section Normally a user will be associated with a default extension If this is not the case then you will be prompted to select your normal extension as detailed below This can only be done if the person is using agent control How To Log into the system 1 Click User and then Login User Name pete smith Password ieii 2 Type ina name in User Name and type in a password alternatively click Browse to search for a name Type part of a user name here Selected user P pete smith Chapter 3 1 MyCalls User Environment 3 The following screen will appear if there is agent control in the license and the agent has not logged into the ACD system Head Office 4 Enter the extension that you are working from 5 Click OK 4 i tip At least one PBX administrator must be defined in the configuration otherwise you can t create or alter any other user The M
262. s all the information you need to know about the current state of your databases Configuration Database Maximum size MB Current size MB Ye Free 16 59 60 The database is OK Call Records Database Maximum size MB Current size MB Free 4000 4 99 93 The database is OK Removing unwanted information You will from time to time need to remove information from the calls alarms audit entries events or deleted devices lists Deleted devices prevent those devices from being automatically reconfigured so be aware that removing them would allow the devices to automatically reconfigure Chapter 15 3 System Utilities How To Remove unwanted information 1 Click System 2 Select Remove Unwanted Information Start Date Start Time EJ 10 2008 00 00 00 End Date End Time 26 10 2008 73 59 59 Alarm Entries Audit Entries E Calls Events Deleted Devices PEAS i re W pT a a I d ka l U 1 Specified Extension In the window that appears select the date and time range that you wish to delete the information up to and the select the types of information to delete e g alarm entries calls Also you can select whether to remove calls to all extensions or calls to specified extensions Click OK Removal of unwanted information will result in a new audit entry being created detailing the fact that information has been removed This audit entry c
263. s in a specified date range or you can specifiy that the system should back up all non backed up calls according to the configuration of the schedule Backup Folder on Recording Server Backup Volume Name Maximum Volume Size MB F CallRecordingBackups 650 Cancel Running Backup Schedule Task Start Time vaty z 31 01 2006 00 00 00 7 z Backup all Calls between these Dates Schedule Task Weekly Start Date Start Time z 30 01 2009 00 00 00 5 Every 1 week s on W Sun F Mon F Tue F Wed F Thu F Fri F Sat End Date End Time 30 01 2009 w 23 59 59 5 Email address for scheduled backup failure notifications The email server has not yet been configured 2 3 The backup folder MUST be one that is local attached to the call recording server How To Manually Start a Call Recording Backup 1 Select the Recording Backup button from Configure Call Recording Backup Dialog 2 Enter the dates for the backup to apply to and press the Backup button Chapter 7 12 Call Recording Backup all Calls between these Dates Start Date start Time 30 01 2009 00 00 00 End Date End Time 30 01 2009 23 59 59 How To Cancel a Running Call Recording Backup 1 Select the Recording Backup button from the Configure Call Recording Backup Dialog Backup Folder on Recording Server F CallRecording Backups gt 3 Press the Cancel Running Backup This will instruct the call recording server
264. s in this list are configurable under Pilot Number Groups The default value is set as None 8 Type Assign the pilot number as either of type ACD Queue or Hunt Group 9 Enable Real Time Statistics This option should be enabled if you want call data collected from the telephone system for this pilot number to be included in the real time statistics It is good practice for pilot numbers not used to have this option disabled so as to minimize unnecessary processing 10 Click OK Chapter 8 18 Telephone System Configuration How To Creating a range of Pilot Numbers From the MyCalls Telephone System Configuration screen click Pilot Numbers Click Create a Range of Pilot Numbers in the Pilot Number configuration area In the dialog window that appears a number of fields are available for entry Some are mandatory fields for successful setup whilst others are optional inputs PE Code Number of Pilot Numbers Head Office 1 Start Pilot Number Type Unassigned Pilot Number Group None Number of Pilot Numbers Enter here the number of pilot numbers you wish to create in the range Start Pilot Number Enter the number to start your pilot number range from here Pilot Number Group You can select a pilot number group to group this range under The values in this list are configurable under pilot number Groups The default value is None Click OK A block of pilot numbers will now have been
265. s installer would create the trunk configuration as they would know the types of trunks available in the telephone system It is important that the trunks are assigned correctly as this will allow you to correctly configure your statistics windows and reports In addition your call recording configuration is assigned to record on specific trunks For Example You have a 30 trunk PRI connection a 2 trunk BRI connection linked to a GSM gateway for mobile calls and 2 Analogue lines linked to the company fax machines You could create several groups as follows e BRI group contains all BRI trunks e PRI group contains all PRI trunks e Faxes group contains all analogue fax lines With this configuration you could report on usage in the following ways e Overall calls in and out on all trunks e Call statistics for the PRI trunks main telephone traffic only e Call statistics for GSM gateway mobile calls e Detect any mobile calls being routed via the PRI trunks e View real time call data for each group of trunks Creating and editing Trunks How To Creating a single Trunk 1 From the MyCalls Telephone System Configuration screen click Trunks G PBXs Elf Head Office oo ty Call Recording E fl Agent Control f Call Control El Devices efi Account Codes ipl DIDs E Extensions G Pilot Numbers JT Trunks Chapter 8 9 Telephone System Configuration Click Create or Edit a Trunk in the T
266. s required In addition agents can be allowed to log onto more than one queue at a time and can enter a variety of states such as unavailable or wrap up when they are busy with other activities MyCalls manages Agent control at various levels e Linking users to queues appropriate to the user s skill set or other criteria e Associating a user with a pin code e Associating user s within an ACD group with a set of unavailable codes e Providing real time information regarding queue status e Reporting on performance Operating Agent Control The agent control toolbar is displayed as a separate movable toolbar and provides the following functions MyCalls Control i i O amp Log In Log Out Wrap Up Stat Unavailable Options Extension 245 Reception Available O1 27 53 Incoming Calls 0 Abandoned Calls O Outgoing Calls O Login Allows a user to login to one or more queues The queues available from the drop down menu will show the queues configured for that user The user can elect to login to specific queues or all login queues marked as primary queues for Agent Control group to which a user belongs MyCalls Control a ws m Ye O Log In Log Out Wrap Up Star All Primary Login Queues When a user logs in they will be prompted for the number of the extension which thay are currently using This allows the ACD system to correctly locate the user when routing calls E s Login Selection Use the default exten
267. s than 20 seconds whereas the maximum time to answer can be in excess of 4 minutes This can lead to a false conclusion that all your answer times are close to the average To check the real TTA values you can run a Call Summary Time Distribution report The data shown below is an extract from such a report and shows the number of calls answered at various TTA s ranging from less than 5 seconds up to 240 seconds or more Whilst the vast majority of calls occur in less than 35 seconds there are still quite a number of calls occurring at well over 2 minutes Chapter 1 11 Welcome to MyCalls Using a service level value indicates the percentage of calls that are answered within the target answer time This is a much better indicator than ATA because we can immediately see the percentage of calls which fall outside our desired answering times We can report on Service level as well as setting alarms and viewing the values in real time on wallboards etc A basic definition of service level is Service level X percent of calls answered in Y seconds This means If 90 of calls are answered within the target time to answer then the service level will be 90 In order to set service levels you will need to analyse time to answer TTA abandonment statistics and call durations However you will need to set realistic targets for these parameters and adjust them based on your ongoing results From the data shown in the table above we can make
268. same process for Extensions Trunks DIDs Account Codes and Pilot Numbers The steps below will describe the deletion process with the example of extensions 2 From the MyCalls Telephone System Configuration screen click Extensions 3 Click Delete a Range of Extensions 4 Inthe dialogue box that appears select the extensions you wish to delete in the extension list You can select multiple extensions by holding down the control key ctrl as you click on the rows 208 a AutoConfig 01 10 2008 09 46 T i AutoC onfig AutoC onfig gi Aoda i3 fn AutoConfig ial 10 2008 115 20 10 2008 16 56 _AutoConfig O11 __ KELMAR SOFT _ m ME Ta EEEE 5 Click OK to complete the deletion process Be aware that you will not be prompted to confirm this process once you press the OK button so please make sure you have the right codes highlighted before pressing OK to continue Chapter 8 6 Telephone System Configuration PBX Configuration Single PBX configurations PBX Configuration takes place during the system installation The Application has been set up to recognise the PBX which controls your telephone system MyCalls links to the PBX and records the telephone call data and for most installations there will probably be one PBX How To Alter the PBX configuration 1 Select the PBX from the telephone system configuration Configure gt Telephone System gt PBXs gt head office 2 Click Ed
269. selected trunks Only record the selected trunks Call Types Record Incoming Calls Record Outgoing Calls ei Chapter 7 4 Call Recording How to Set up recording rules for Extensions Extensions Selected Available 208 236 a 302 sr fof i 400 A S Do not record the selected extensions E Only record the selected extensions 1 Add devices to the Selected list by selecting them in the Available list and clicking 2 Choose Do not record the selected devices or Only record the selected extensions You can also decide to include incoming only outgoing calls only or both Using the Call Playback Interface Once logged into MyCalls the calls list will provide access to the recorded calls The leftmost column of the calls list provides an Icon to indicate the call recording status No Icon indicates there is no recording for that call A plain speaker icon indicates a recording has been matched to the call 6 A greyed out speaker icon indicates a recording has been matched to the call but the recording has been disabled A speaker icon with a red cross indicates a recording has been matched to the call but the user is barred from playing back the call Ry A speaker icon with a red cross and a green arrow indicates the call is a transferred incoming call a recording has been matched to the call but the user is barred from playing back at least part of t
270. sion Use a different extension FEX Extension 7 drat l aa Haearn i Tire 7th s m i EO Saat il T lmi Logout logout of one or more queues Wrap up Start Stop A user can enter wrap up or exit wrap up state The icon toggles state when clicked Chapter 13 2 Agent Control ee In ton Ou a sean Unavailable Options Refreshment Natural Break Smoking Always On Top Tool Buttons e Lock Toolbar e Always keep the toolbar on top of other windows e Set visible tool buttons and shortcut keys Category Current hot key Cir F5 Global Hot Key Mowe Up Press new hot key Reset All oK Viewing Agent activity Prerequisites For the queue status described below to show any activity you will need to have configured users for Agent control and users must have logged in For our example we have created Chapter 13 3 Agent Control an ACD queue called sales and allocated two users to that queue Mark and John See later in this section for details regarding configuration of the queues and users To view queue activity you will need to configure a real time queue status window Full details of this are described in the Real time status section of the manual but a summary is described here From the MyCalls menu select View gt Real time information gt Real time status gt DID Status gt Queue Status Select the Detailed view and click OK A
271. sociations are the rules by which the correct carrier for each outgoing call type is determined A carrier can be directly specified which means that the same carrier will always be used for those types of call or least cost routing could be specified which means that the carrier will be automatically selected using the least cost routing digits If least cost routing is specified as the carrier but no match is found in the least cost routing numbers then the call will not be costed How To Editing Carrier associations 1 Select the Costs option from the Configure menu or click the icon on the toolbar 2 Expand the Location Specific category in the left pane of the window This will display all available PBXs in your enterprise Expand the PBX you want to configure the costs for Fed Costs 8 Handling Costs lt Location Specific El PBXs S Head Office a Local Area Codes fe gamer Associations 3 Click Carrier Associations option 4 Click Edit Carrier Associations Call Type Carrier Local BT Business National BT Business Intern ational BT Business Special Numbers BF hein Mobile Numbers BT Business 5 This window will list all the call types used by the system and for each call type the carrier being used to provide the costing information You can select pre installed carrier information which by default will include BT Business and Least Cost Routing If additional carriers are required then
272. summaries for the device type Trunk Transferred calls are being reported as a single call Group Inc Abd So ANS SoA bd ANS atters0 secs Abd after 30 secs Head Office All Trunks 3 0 100 00 0 00 33 53 0 00 Daily Outgoing Call Performance Provides a summary of outgoing call performance The information included on the report is user selectable along with the headings and widths of the columns used to display the information Custom Group Member Summary Daily Outgoing Call Performance Created On 18 11 2008 11 34 52 Covering Period 18 11 2008 00 00 00 to 18 11 2008 23 59 59 Report Filtered To Only include call types Outgoing or Outgoing Conference or Outgoing Abandoned or Outgoing Transferred or Outgoing Op Assist or Outgoing Line to Line or Network Outgoing Show summaries for the device type Extension Transferred calls are being reported as a multiple calls Group Out Abd Out Avg Out Time Max Call Time Total Time Busy Time Busy Time Free Head Office All Desk Phones 235 Reception 0 0 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 0 00 0 00 300 Mark 0 0 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 0 00 0 00 301 Max 0 0 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 0 00 0 00 Totals 0 0 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 Chapter 14 6 Reporting Daily Summary of ACD Group performance Provides a summary of ACD performance The information included on the report is user selectable along with the headings and widths of the columns used to display the information
273. system PBX When a call comes in via a DID Auto Attendant or Receptionist it can be routed to an ACD Queue also referred to as a Pilot number in MyCalls Logical rules for ACD routing attempt to ensure that agents are fed calls evenly in an attempt to spread the call load Chapter 1 16 Welcome to MyCalls Agent Control Agent control allows you to match your staff activities to the varying call volumes You can manage logging staff onto ACD queues and monitor queue call statistics in real time Agent Control can e Logon and off queues e Define which queues your staff can log onto e Remotely log staff on and off queues e Monitor your staff s queue activity and current status in real time e Manage wrap up times e Unavailable codes give the reasons that staff are unavailable at specific times e Generate queue usage reports e Report on call activity based around ACD routing rules Using DID numbers It is useful to automatically route calls to extensions directly whilst keeping the number of trunks to a minimum This can be accomplished by the use of DIDs DIDs allow specific inbound numbers to be routed to private extensions without the need for an auto attendant or a call transfer DID is most useful on PRI or BRI trunks where several channels can be assigned as DID channels In this way a single PRI trunk group could handle hundreds of phone numbers using only 30 channels or less An office with 80 extensions could have 80 c
274. t occurring in the telephone system Real time status parameters can be displayed for the following types of devices and users e Users e Extensions e DID s e Pilot Numbers e Trunk Groups User status gives a real time visual indication of the current state of the extension a user is logged on to Extension status view is also available for specific extensions You can view the following states e Idle Available The extension user is available to receive calls e Off Hook Receiver is picked up e Ringing Incoming call is ringing the extension or user e Incoming connected Incoming call has been connected call in progress e Outgoing connected outgoing call has been connected call in progress e Hold The extension has been put on hold or an extension has put another on hold e Internal Internal extension to extension call is in progress e DND Do Not Disturb Extension is unavailable to receive calls e Unavailable ACD User is unavailable to the ACD queues e Wrap UP ACD User is wrapping up a call and is not currently available for a predefined time Real time status parameters for queues e g DID Pilot Numbers and Trunk Groups include e Caller e Trunk e Usage trunk Groups only e Calls In Queue Chapter 5 2 Real Time Status e Longest Wait Time The following diagram shows how you might use real time status windows to look at calls being queued at different points in the telephone s
275. tart Trunk Number Type Unassigned Trunk Group Alternate Carrier None None Chapter 8 10 Telephone System Configuration Number of trunks Enter the number of trunks you wish to create in the range Start Trunk Number Enter the number to start your trunk range from here Trunk Group Select the trunk type from the drop down menu Alternate Carrier Assign an alternate carrier to the trunk range This means that calls made on this trunk can have different costings applied Click OK A block of trunks will now have been inserted into the Configured Trunks list box You should configure these trunks with appropriate name and options using procedures described later in this topic before clicking the OK button to complete your trunk creation process Note that the trunks you create should correspond to those configured in the telephone system Editing existing Trunks How To Editing existing Trunks 1 From the MyCalls Telephone System Configuration screen click Trunks 2 Click Create or Edit a Trunk in the Trunk configuration area The Edit trunk screen appears 002 002 Unassigned None 005 005 Unassigned Mone 3 Inthe dialog box that appears click the Edit button to the right of the trunk you want to edit 4 In the second dialog box that appears configure a Name for the trunk and if required select a trunk Group trunk Type and assign an alternate carrier FEX Code Number
276. ted 25 minutes Average durations e g the average incoming call lasted 5 minutes Ranges of durations Minimum Maximum etc The values available are e Abandoned ring e Average abandoned ring e Average held e Average incoming e Average incoming outgoing e Average incoming ring e Average outgoing e Average ring no answer ring time e Held e Incoming e Incoming outgoing e Incoming ring e Longest abandoned ring e Longest incoming ring e Longest ring no answer ring time e Max call time e Min abandoned ring e Min incoming ring e Min ring no answer time e Outgoing e Ring no answer time Chapter 14 38 Reporting call Durations Time to Answer Gives the Time to Answer a specific percentage of calls e g how long did it take to answer 50 of calls Custom Summary Reports Costs General e Call costs e Fixed Costs e Handling costs e Max incoming call e Max incoming handling e Max outgoing call e Max outgoing handling e Overall cost e Profit e Taxes e Total incoming call e Total incoming handling e Total outgoing call e Total outgoing handling Category Counts Category Totals Category Averages e Free e In state e Incoming e International e Local e Local toll e Long distance e Mobile e National e National Generic e Not defined e Special e Unknown Custom Summary Reports Call Counts Call counts for different types of calls as follows e Aba
277. that number are greater than 3 Limit number of items on the report to a maxiumum of 50 Report ordered by Number of Times Transferred calls are being reported as a single call CallCost Handling Caller Name Type Number Location Amount Duration Cost Total Cost 1 232 22 31 12 0 00 0 00 0 00 100 00 00 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 07834659313 Non Geographic Area Code 92 04 38 28 21 17 0 00 21 17 01494688900 High Wycombe 79 01 47 25 0 00 0 00 0 00 Top Calls Provides information listing the calls with Duration Held time or Ring time greater than a defined value or calls with a call cost or handling cost of greater than a defined value Statistics for these calls in the report are e Time of call e PBX e Extension e User e Duration e Dialled Number e Location e Ring Time e Call Cost e Handling Cost Chapter 14 34 Reporting e Total Cost Only Include Calls ime Greater than Call tone 00 00 02 Cost More Than Cost Type 0 00 Call Cost Group tems on Report By Dialed Number Order Report Output By Time of Call Custom Reports What is a Custom Report A custom report allows you to specify precisely what information you want to include in the report fields For example if you require a report which does not show costing information in a call details report then a custom report can be configured to accomplish that The majority of the configuration process for custom reports follows the standa
278. the current area codes for the country If exporting then the file will be saved in a CSV format use an editor such as Notepad to make any changes Use the import option to bring the new version back into the system Click OK the new area codes will be saved back to the database A SouthAfncaAreaCodes csv Notepad File Edit Format View Help ROSEBANK 11115 28 0421 26 1450 ROSEBANK 11141 28 0421 26 1450 KELVIN 11202 28 0859 26 0452 RANDITESFONTEIN 11203 28 1425 25 9516 HALFWAY HOUSE 11205 28 11666 25 98333 OLIFANTSFONTEIN 11206 28 2394 25 9639 HALFWAY HOUSE 1120 7 28 11666 25 98333 Chapter 15 7 Importing Data Into MyCalls 4 Da tip When upgrading the system to a different version any changes you make to the area codes will need to be re imported Chapter 1 6 Importing Data Into MyCalls Configuration data can be imported from a comma delimited file CSV files CSV files can be generated from programs such as excel spreadsheets Import is supported for the following types of entity e Account codes e DDIls e Extensions e Pilot numbers e Trunks e Callers e Users The steps required to import a set of values are very similar for all the various entities Devices all share the same import format Callers and users have different formats Importing devices Device Import formats All devices follow the same format of Name Extension This is easily produced in
279. they will have to be configured through the carrier setup screen 6 Click OK Chapter 12 13 Call Costing Edit Profit Margins A profit margin can be applied to a call for each class of call type The profit margin is calculated after the call costs and handling costs have been applied The margin can be specified as either a fixed amount or as a percentage of the total cost How To Editing Profit Margins 1 Select the Costs option from the Configure menu or click the icon on the toolbar 2 Expand the Location Specific category in the left pane of the window This will display all available PBXs in your enterprise Expand the PBX you want to configure the costs for 3 Click the Profit option 4 Click Edit Profit Margins Call Type Profit Apply as Incoming 6 00 a Free 0 00 Fs Local 7 50 yA 5 This window will list all the call types used by the system and for each call type you can enter a Profit value in the Profit column Then you can select from the Apply as column whether you want to apply the profit as a percentage of the calls total cost or as a fixed amount 6 Click OK Chapter 12 14 Call Costing Edit Taxes The taxes that are applied to calls are intended to be used when invoice styled reports are generated to be used to bill external customers The cost of a call that is subject to taxes is the call cost handling cost profit Up to fou
280. ting period The reports for time distribution time interval and profile require two distinct settings related to time intervals The reporting period Defines the start and end date during which the data for the report was recorded For example we may want to view a report for the month of August or for the past six months or for the past two days These are all reporting periods and they are configured as the first part of the report wizard as described in the relevant section above The statistical interval s describe the intervals of time over which the summarized results are calculated An example might be where we show a breakdown of incoming calls for each day for the month of August The statistical interval would therefore be Daily whereas the reporting period would be 1 to 30 of August More specific detail on the interval periods employed are explained in the following sections which describe the configuration of each type of report call summary over same interval This report gives a comparison of two call types The example here shows Incoming and Incoming abandoned for the same period split up into day of week totals The reporting period is over 1 month August 2008 so the totals for each Monday represent a total of all calls received on all Mondays during the reporting period Chapter 14 27 Call Summary over same Interval Created On CoveringPeriod 01 08 2008 00 00 00 to 30 08 2008 23 59 59 23 10 2008
281. tion General Configuration Tasks for devices Configuration of devices follows a similar set of operations for each type of device e Decide on what devices you are going to configure e Arrange you devices into functional groups to allow more meaningful reporting or screen displays e Create the device groups e Create the devices e Assign an identifier to the device e g extension number or DID number specify device specific information assign users to the device and configure all device options e Assign the devices to their respective groups Chapter 8 4 Telephone System Configuration Ranges of items How To Creating an item or range of items 1 From the device configuration window e g Configure gt Telephone systems gt Devices gt Extensions select the Create a range of option ig PBXs f Head Office i Call Recording E i Agent Control E iy Call Control g Devices dif Account Codes Select the number of devices to create Enter the start value for the device number e g create 100 extensions starting at 201 will create extensions 201 to 301 Optional steps 4 Assign a type to the device e g Digital Desk Phone 5 Assign the devices to a group 6 Add any relevant notes 7 Click OK Chapter 8 5 Telephone System Configuration Deleting an item or range of items How To Deleting an item of a range of items 1 Deleting an item or a range of items requires the
282. tion and Users The MyCalls Configuration menu provides the following configuration selections Telephone System Configure details for your PBX switches Telephone extensions Trunks DID s Account codes Pilot numbers ACD User Logins PIN codes call recording agent and call control Organisation Configure the users and departments within your organization and set user privileges Callers Define people who call you or conversely people who you call on a regular basis Identify callers according to organization or purpose of call e g business or personal callers and create your own caller groups so you can monitor how much time is spent dealing with various organizations Costs Configure a wide range of call costing parameters to allow you to track the costs incurred specify least cost routing and deal with multiple carriers for your call routing Alarms Manage your business effectively by configuring alarms to alert you when an exception condition occurs You can generate reports to show where and when these alarm conditions have occurred You can monitor call rates performance emergency calls disallowed calls etc and assign these to groups devices and users Alarms can be flashed up on the screen and distributed via email System Settings Allow setting up of an email and FTP server for distribution of alarms and reports Operational settings Grace periods allow you to ignore invalid ring times or call lengths and can be c
283. to take calls usually on one or more ACD queues User Login MyCalls A unique username and password combination assigned to a MyCalls User to allow the user to use the MyCalls application Wallboard Also called reader boards display boards or wall displays A visual display usually mounted on the wall or ceiling that provides real time and historical information on queue conditions agent status and call centre performance Wide Area Network WAN The connection of multiple computers across a wide area Wrap Up Codes Codes which agents enter on their phones to identify the types of calls they are handing The ACD can then generate reports on call types by handling time time of day etc Chapter 17 9 MyCalls Licensing Appendix A MyCalls Licensing MyCalls uses a licensing system to control the features available within the product Once MyCalls has been installed the user will be unaware of any licensing mechanisms other than the fact that certain features will be unavailable There are five versions of the MyCalls Product MyCalls XN120 MyCalls XN120 Call Manager MyCalls Aspire SV8100 MyCalls Aspire SV8100 Call Manager MyCalls Aspire SV8100 Call Centre The default license purchased for each contains the following features Feature XN120 Aspire SV8100 MyCalls MyCalls Call MyCalls MyCalls Call MyCalls Call Manager Manager Centre Default Extensions Unlimited Unlimited Unlimited Unlimited Costing Performanc
284. top User You can assign screen layouts to Agent Desktop users This means that the next time these users log on they will view the layout assigned to them The Agent Desktop users are unable to modify the layout 2 To assign a layout to an Agent Desktop user select the Assign option from the Layout menu 3 The Assign Screen Layouts screen will be displayed Layout Name Assigned Users Main stats max Office admin Using the Layout Name drop down list you can select the name of the screen layout you want to assign to the Agent Desktop users In the Assigned Users field you will see a list of all the Agent Desktop users configured within MyCalls You can assign the currently selected layout to the users by clicking the box to the left of the user s name This will then display a tick to show that the user is assigned the currently selected layout You can remove the tick from a user to de assign a screen layout from them Press OK to save the assign layout selection to the Agent Desktop users Layout Pages Pages are the main component of a screen layout They enable you to display real time window information and arrange it in a way that best suits your organization Layout Configure View Reports System User In Load Public Save Public Delete Public Assign pe te amp Reset to Installation Default Pages View as Agent Desktop Delete Save all Copy Reload You ca
285. ttendandauendcadeseodenbaataaciaseadeo tases T 16 HMPONU ae chers SCUUIN ES eni scetwaawsetacisaue naw scnewnaneaawnaasdaanenebceae ncedine nausea a N 16 HOW TO Impor a carriers SENE teed corer icin a N E 17 EAIC OMT EX SUNE Care aaaea a E TA TANT 17 HOW TO Editing anexISting Carrer mearan e A AASEN 18 Delete aC anmerken E sree nee ere te mee neg eee err een an i er 18 HOW TO Delete ca Cal Lier doiaren a ET T T taba cetheyndeadoanee 18 BYU Yo ered r Wa Cane aenaran aa te Denn neces ra ert Ov een De ST eS eee ee 18 HOW TO Duplicate a Carrie ess atte ec Re E es ates een eee oe 19 Carrier Costing Periodens a E agape rales wacieaee suiaaxcsuemeuan ae oors 19 HOW TO Editing Costing POO S enun crtce Cetin cerei ned T puedes handbag lane saud wnnaweatawenewiece 20 Carer ACCS ns sorcery aces ant cnctesinasaeat a A T r mae atone 20 How To Add or Import a new Carrier Rate ccccccsscccsssccccssecccesccceeeceeeeseceeeneeeseueeeeescessueceneneeees 21 HOW TO Delele a Carrer Rave cora n a detadaecden nave ld E 22 HOWE TOs Edit Carrier Rates nore Sosy ueracieaedae awaniciesaseencute sasadueaneaceaqunenscaacanecepaeuiauearees 22 Chapter 13 AGENT CONTROL icenean teas ana eee 1 Agent Control and Automatic Call Distribution ACD c ccc cceccccsescccsecseeeeceeeeeceseeneeeeeesesenesenensess 1 SA QUOT CS aa S A A ears 1 Operan Agent CONTON anari a vena tatace iad a Severe totaebauadoea eae 2 VIEWING ABCC ACEIVILY s a cent tareuaaneusewmiautiyn
286. types Incoming Abandoned Include all matching items in the report Report grouped by None Report ordered by Time of Call Transferred calls are being reported as a multiple calls Time Of Call DID Number Extension Number Ring Time Totals Total Calis Totals Total Calls Chapter 14 4 Reporting Daily List Misdialled Outgoing Calls Provides a list of misdialled outgoing calls that are grouped by a specified device type such as extension or account code The report can be further filtered so it only applies to a certain range of devices such as a specific extensions group or organization group The information included on the report is user selectable along with the headings and widths of the columns used to display the information Custom Call Details Daily List Misdialled Outgoing Calls Created On 16 11 2008 11 27 51 Covering Pernod 16 11 2008 00 00 00 ta 22 11 2008 23 59 59 Report Filtered To Only include call types Outgoing Abandoned Include all matching items in the report Report grouped by None Report ordered by Time of Call Transferred calls are being reported as a multiple calls Time Of Call Extension Number Daily List of Personal Calls Provides a list of personal calls that are grouped by a specified device type such as extension or account code The report can be further filtered so it only applies to a certain range of devices such as a specific extensions group or organization group The information inc
287. u E i Real Time Status H Real Time Statistics Erm Single Value nE Combination Values 3 From this menu you can select the type of window you wish to view Chapter 5 1 Real Time Status Real Time Status Windows A real time status window is one that displays a value that is derived from changes in state from the phone system Configuring a Real Time Status window enables you to see immediate response to events which are occurring now for example off hook ringing and on hold conditions These windows can be configured to show information relating to Users Extensions DIDs Pilot numbers and Trunk groups Users and Extensions can give us device status information i e what state are they in at this moment DIDs Pilot Numbers and Trunk Groups represent queues of calls related to a particular DID Pilot or Trunk group so the real time status associated with these items relates to the current number of calls waiting to be answered i e Calls in Queue CIQ A DID queue relates to the calls currently waiting which dialled that DID number A Pilot queue relates to all calls which have been forwarded to a particular ACD queue via a Pilot number A Trunk group queue represents the number of calls waiting to be answered at this moment in time for the trunks in that group or all trunks if selected Real Time Status Parameters A Real time status parameter is a value that is displayed in real time as a result of an even
288. ude e Detail and summary reports e Time distribution and profiling e Frequent calls e Top Calls e Trunk Utilisation e Custom reports Standard Report Incoming Transferred Reporting Second Set of Call Types to Include Together Unknown Incoming Select All E Incoming Conference Incoming Abandoned re Incoming Abandoned Voice M Select None For the purposes of this manual a basic report configuration would contain one or more of the following configuration steps e Reporting period e Grouping e Ordering e Transfer Consolidation e Filtering e Call type selection Most reports contain these steps plus in most cases additional report specific screens These standard configuration steps are explained in the previous section The following sections describe the specific report templates and any special report specific configuration screen Availability Reports User Availability Displays a summary of number of times and average time spent in various states Logins On Call Wrap Up Unavailable DND User Availability Created On 24 10 2008 15 00 45 CoveringPerod 24 10 2008 00 00 00 to 24 10 2008 23 59 59 Report Filtered To Only include organisation groups Organisation Logins On Call User Hum Avg Dur Num Avg Dur H Cost Num 0 00 00 00 0 00 00 00 0 00 0 Wrapup Unavailable DNO Avg Dur H Cost Num Avg Dur H Cost Num Avg Dur H Cosi 00 00 00 0 00 00 00 0 00 00 00 Cha
289. uiries __ dqi5 Directory Enguiries dq 6 Directory Enquiries 3 __ dqi7 Directory Enguiries dq18 Directory Enquiries _ dg15 Directory Enquiries dq Directory Enquiries dad Directory Enquiries 5 Select the carrier rates you wish to delete You can select multiple carrier rates by holding down control Ctrl while you select with the mouse 6 Click OK How To Edit Carrier Rates 1 Select the Costs option from the Configure menu or click the icon on the toolbar Chapter 12 22 Call Costing 2 Expand the Carriers option and select the carrier name of the configuration you want to edit 3 Select the Carrier Rates option 4 Click Add or Edit Carrier Rates Name Period Inital Cost E Min Cost E Thereafter Cost Thereafter Rate Thereafter Interval c Callsto Daytime 0 0000 00420 O 107p 00 0100 le Edit c Callsto Evening 08 000 00420 0 0620 E omo Edit c Callsto Morning 0 0000 0 0420 0 0620 i 00000 Edit c Callsto Weekend 0 0000 0 0420 0 0327 00 01 00 Edit d Calls to Daytime 0 0000 0 0420 0 1422 E 00 01 00 Edit 5 To edit the carrier rate you can either select the row as shown above and edit by selecting each column and altering the data 6 Alternatively you can click the Edit button to the right of the carrier rate you want to edit 7 The edit a carrier rate window appears where you ca
290. ular type e g All Trunks or you can select individual device groups Chapter 11 4 Alarms Minimum calls per hour Maximum calls per hour Trunk Group Ji ne T Ei Aia 7 Include Extension groups Minimum calls per hour Maximum calls per hour Extension Group oO B oO B Admin Include DID groups Minimum calls per hour Maximum calls per hour DID Group Bane pl bet l Lr a Performance Alarms Performance alarms are designed to measure the effectiveness of the people answering or making the telephone calls Performance alarms can be set for e Incoming Wait Time e Overflowed Wait Time e Abandoned Wait Time e Incoming Call Time e Overflowed Call Time e Outgoing Call Time e Abandoned Call Time e General Service Level e Abandoned Service Level The setup of these alarms is identical to the call rate alarms described in the previous section You select which alarm type you wish to generate e g wait time call duration etc and specify the device or user groups to which this alarm applies You can only specify one of each device group per alarm setup but you can set as many of each type of alarm as required For example to set a wait time alarm for the extension group called Sales with different wait times to the extension group called Service then you would need to create two wait time alarms each with different settings which you could call Sales and Service to easily identify each alarm
291. ure Alternatively you can edit the rows without clicking edit Click in the name column and enter a name click in type column and select a type from the drop down menu and click in the group column and assign the person to a group If you would like to enable statistics for a particular person tick the box in the enable statistics column Click OK to save all the changes you have made DIDs DIDs Direct Inbound Dials are numbers that customers dial to reach either an individual personal DID or a specific group DIDs can be published to customers and reports can be generated to identify which DIDs are the most effective Creating and Editing DIDs How To Creating a single DID 1 From the MyCalls Telephone System Configuration screen click DIDs 2 Click Create or Edit a DID in the DID configuration area The Edit DID screen appears 3 Click the Add New DID button 4 Inthe dialogue window that appears a number of fields are available for entry Some are mandatory fields for successful setup whilst others are optional inputs as outlined below FEX Code Number Name Head Office DID Group None Enable Real Time Statistics Callback Number Number Enter here the number of the DID you wish to create This must be for a valid DID number configured on your telephone system Name Enter a name for the DID to identify its purpose If left blank the system will populate this field with t
292. ure the correct configuration details have been supplied The PBA trunks may optionally be assigned to the recorder channels Recording Server Name Password Recording Rules Playback Port Download Speed KBits sec 300 S S000 Fe Recording Backup Archive Port galz Trunk Mappings Trunk Unit ID Channel Trunk Type Trunk Licensing Whilst trunk licensing is an installation operation it may be necessary for a system administrator to adjust or configure additional channels of call recording The call recorder is licensed to record a certain number and type of channels based on what the customer has bought In order to know which of the channels are to be used the trunks in MyCalls need to be set to the correct type and marked for inclusion in call recording Only trunks that are marked as ISDN or AN4009 are listed Trunks that are either BRI or PRI need to be marked as ISDN within MyCalls Trunks that are analogue need to be marked as Analogue within MyCalls Remaining licenses for each type of trunk are indicated to the right of the Trunk Licensing grid Trunk Licensing eae emaining Licenses Trunk Type Call Recorder Licensed 001 Digital Main Office M Digital 26 002 Digital Main Office 005 Digital C romptom Road Analog amp 006 Digital Cromptom Road ar Cancel Chapter 7 11 Call Recording Backup Call Recordings Call recordings can and should be backed up to an are
293. using Automatic Call Distribution ACD cccccccccccccsseceeeesececeeeceeteeeeeeeeaeseeeeas 4 Realtime SU AUIS GING SCAUISCIC 5 crac creachectt somcemcncnce S R 4 Developing your Strategy USING Reporting cccccssscccesseccesececenceeeesceeeaececeneeeeeeeteeseeesenecensneeeeees 5 IANO SCTICIIE VOX C20 COI enirar aE EEE TE NE EAE TEE 5 TAEDE D e EE E E 5 Measuring current call volume Senere EE T E 6 CO Sia cies ce a E S aut acta Saueaat tie nce iauanseetseununeoeoneevaaenneersseueee 6 TONK U Oo aac eggs ae ene Gases se cnc elon saan E E E EE 8 Measure DOM OR MTA CS saci cceash sacs eknecadseascadeesedendseuaccansventnnseaeesadeeknnsadieanindeewedondiduacsenteaniabemeesaiseeneadewaets 10 SYSTEM PECPSPECTIVE ccscccsccssccssccsccsscesccnseescceececesecascesssaecesecasscascesseaeceseeaecesseesesasceseascesteaeceaes 10 Customer perspective sendis ENEO 10 SPERO NCS sy a E E E E 10 BEC aKOOW IN OF a Call eo E E E E A E E A cos 10 Reports to help with assessing your performance cseccccessecccecescceceesececeeececeeeusccessusecesseneces 13 Reame S SUG a E E E A E 14 How to group on different devices ssssssssssesssrrressrrrresrrresrrrrssrrrressrersserressrrrssereressrereseeresererssererese 15 TOUDE NOONE oi E neni teed ences eaneeenes 15 M nt Groups and ACD QUEUES sonia E E E E E 16 HUNC GO OS aeea a EE E E S EAE EE E cons 16 A DS arcs steed E E see esetennerssavanencesasequanneoncaucameasedanequcesseneaseguctates
294. utside the organisation whereas Fraud Alarms may be sent to supervisors Alarm Categories MyCalls currently has the following different types of alarm with more added on each release of software System Alarms These are triggered when either no data is received from the PBX for a certain period or if the free disk space on the disk that the database is situated on is below a specified level Call Rate Alarms Chapter 11 1 Alarms Measures the rate at which calls have been handled in a one hour period This can occur if there are either too few or too many calls handled Too few indicates that calls are taking too long and too many indicates that calls may too short There are several types of call rate alarm e Abandoned Call Rate Alarms e Outgoing Call Rate Alarms e Incoming Call Rate Alarms Overflow Alarms An overflow alarm indicates when an overflow situation has occurred This happens when a call has been transferred between ACD Groups before being answered For other PBX types Overflow is defined as a call that has been transferred between ACD Queues Pilot Numbers before being answered Wait Time Alarms Determined by what is an acceptable minimum and maximum average wait time for a one hour period An average wait time that is less than the minimum value can indicate that you have too many free staff and they are just waiting for the phone to ring An average wait time that is more than the maximum value in
295. value 20 Show the intervals that did not meet the Abandonded GOS value 90 Transferred calls are being reported as a multiple calls PBX Group Period Start GOSType GOS Grade of service group summary This report shows a summary of the percentage of groups which met or exceeded target grade of service for duration and abandoned calls Grade of Service Group Summary Created On 24 10 2008 15 29 28 Covering Period 01 08 2008 00 00 00 to 30 08 2008 23 59 59 Report Filtered To Show the percentage of intervals that met or exceeded GOS value 80 Show the percentage of intervals that met or exceeded Abandonded GOS value 90 Transferred calls are being reported as a multiple calls of 30 Minute Intervals that of 30 Minute Intervals that metAbd PBX met GOS value GOS value All DIDs Head Office 100 00 100 00 Chapter 14 22 Reporting Response times Lists for each extension the number of answered calls abandoned calls and a relative percentage of how each extension response time compares with the rest of the group Response Times Created On 24 10 2008 16 08 35 Covering Period 01 08 2008 00 00 00 to 10 08 2008 23 59 59 Report Filtered To Report ordered by Extension Transferred calls are being reported as a multiple calls Number of Calls Avg Ans PeakAns DiffofNum DiffofNum Diff of Ans PBX Extension User Ans Abd RingTime RingTime Abd ofAns Calls ofAbd Calls Ring Time Head Office Alan None 67 554
296. y Also called delay before answer An ACD feature that enables the system to adjust the number of rings before the system automatically answers a call Service Level Alarms Determine the minimum average and maximum average acceptable Grade of Service GOS in a one hour period A value below the minimum average can indicate that there are not enough staff available to take all of the calls Conversely if the value is above the maximum value it might indicate that there are too many people available to answer calls Single Value Parameter A real time parameter that holds information about one statistic For example Number of Incoming Calls System Alarms Are triggered when either no data is received from the PBX for a certain period or if the free disk space on the disk that the database is situated on is below a specified level Screen Monitoring A system capability that enables a supervisor or manager to remotely monitor the activity on agent s computer terminals Screen Refresh The rate at which real time information is updated on a display Screen refresh does not correlate with the time frame used for real time calculations Skills Based Routing An ACD capability that matches a caller s specific needs with an agent that has the skills to handle that call on a real time basis Talk Time Everything from hello to goodbye in a phone call In other words it s the time callers are connected with agents Anything that happens durin
297. y aspects of the way your business communications evolve The phrase If you can t measure it you can t manage it applies particularly well to the management of telecommunications within an organisation Here are some suggestions as to how you can improve various business areas using MyCalls analysis Maintain available lines MyCalls reporting capabilities can be used to optimize telephone networks by monitoring trunk utilisation By reviewing detailed facilities usage reports you can determine if the telephone network is being used as expected For example are expenditures for facilities equipment and services in line with the income generated by their use Or can savings be obtained through more efficient use of these services MyCalls reports allows your business to determine the busiest hours and associated network usage This information is essential to ensuring that employees always have access to outbound lines and that customers can always reach support personnel Reduce costs Analyse costing of Calls and Staff Quantify Inter departmental calls mobile usage minimise fraudulent phone use Staff focus and motivation Generate and display real time statistics so your staff can see their progress throughout the day Real time notifications let staff know where problems lie For example calls taking too long Regular posted reports showing weekly league tables or positive results gained Complaints handling Call record
298. yed as single value performance statistic included in custom reports and also set alarms based on call performance Long Calls The Grade of service configuration allows us to set the Incoming call duration limits outgoing call duration limits and internal call duration limits These allow us to define the limits for long calls Long calls can be displayed as Single value performance statistics included in custom reports and also set alarms based on call performance To access grades of service and grace periods Click Configure gt operational settings and then either grade of service or grace periods Grade of service configuration Grade of service can be configured across the whole organization or specified on a group by group basis Within the Grade of service configuration screen you add the groups required to the list of Active groups Specify for each group the settings for the following Incoming Overflow ring time If a call rings for longer than this period then the call will be treated as a long ring Abandoned ring time If a call was abandoned after ringing for more than this time then the abandoned ring will be treated as too long Chapter 8 30 Telephone System Configuration Incoming Overflow call duration Outgoing and internal call durations Specified the maximum length of call Any call lasting longer than this time is considered a long call How To Configure Grade of Service
299. ystem Using Real Time Status screens to track call progress Trunk Group Status X Digital Trunks Calls may be made by dialling a DID fra e g Copier Sales Calls made to a DID can be routed to Longest Call Waiting 00 0 1 35 a group of extensions Trunk status tracks trunk N NN ON A N aoe A A A A DID Status Copier Sales Dept Longest Call Waiting 00 01 10 Name David Number 2306 DID queue status tracks calls DID Copier Sales on a given DID number Pilot Caller Code Time 16 30 CIQ calls in queue Status Incoming CIQ for trunks number of trunks waiting Mike to be answered Tony CIQ for DID number of calls on the DID waiting to be answered Extension status tracks device or user activity Real Time Status tells us what is happening now and changes as the call activity changes Real Time Statistics tell us the total calls or average wait times spread over a defined period e g during the last hour or previous 24 hours Chapter 5 3 Real Time Status User Extension Status views Detail Summary and Overview views Real Time Status windows offer three ways of viewing extension or user status Detailed Summary and Overview Detailed view This view is designed for the use of people in a supervisory role who may want to see the state of each extension or user and the amount of time they have been in that state You can show combinations of states as
300. ystem and ensure that the management of your telephone system is kept within the boundaries which you set Not all features described in this manual are available for all versions of telephone system or are available in the features enabled within the product license As an example all ACD related features including Pilot Numbers are only available on Aspire or SV8100 versions AND have MyCalls Call Centre installed For upgrades to your license please contact your reseller MyCalls contains the following components Call Logging See ata glance all the important information you need to manage and plan your telephone communication strategy Call Costing Set limits on call costs and staff costs associated with your calls Comprehensive Alarm Functions Manage by exception This gives you more free time to attend to the important matters of your business knowing you will be alerted to problems only when they occur Sophisticated Reporting Gives you summary and detailed analysis of the telephone data you can gather reports on call data user activity response call volumes comparisons of call data Device usage ACD queuing and routing in fact all aspects of your phone usage You can also create completely customised reports showing any value calculated across any date and time filtered down to devices or users of your choice Real Time Status Monitor the immediate status of your devices extensions and users such as calls in progress call
301. yyy ZZZZ No 2 Costing Type defines the country costing schema used for this PBX 3 Trunk Prefix First digit of a non local number 4 The minimum and maximum number of area code digits 5 Minimum and maximum number of subscriber digits 6 Specify whether the numbers are fixed format i e the same number of digits for all numbers 7 Click OK Device Configuration Types of devices Devices configurable within MyCalls are as follows e Trunks e Extensions e DIDs Direct Inbound Dial numbers e Account codes e User Logins Pin Codes e Pilot Numbers Trunks Trunks Lines are devices that connect the PBX to other switching devices such as the PSTN or another PBX Trunks come in various types ISDN Analogue TCP IP or Q SIG depending on what the PBX is connecting to Organising and Naming Trunks We need to define trunks for the following reasons e Wecan report on trunk usage e Analyzing overall performance of our telephone system helps us to identify weaknesses in the system at the physical level e g have we enough trunks Chapter 8 8 Telephone System Configuration e We can view the overall call statistics of our entire telephone system e Required to configure Call recording which is licensed on a trunk by trunk basis e Helpful when Identifying faults on your telephone system if for example a trunk is showing abnormally low usage Assigning and grouping Trunks Generally the MyCall

MyCalls End User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents